advertisement
Insight Managed 8-Port
Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Models GC110, GC110P, GC510P, and GC510PP
User Manual
July 2018
202-11745-04
350 East Plumeria Drive
San Jose, CA 95134
USA
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Support
Thank you for purchasing this NETGEAR product. You can visit
www.netgear.com/support
to register your product, get help, access the latest downloads and user manuals, and join our community. We recommend that you use only official NETGEAR support resources.
Conformity
For the current EU Declaration of Conformity, visit
http://kb.netgear.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/11621
.
Compliance
For regulatory compliance information, visit
http://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory
.
See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.
Do not use this device outdoors. If you connect cables or devices that are outdoors to this device, see
http://kb.netgear.com/000057103
for safety and warranty information.
Trademarks
© NETGEAR, Inc., NETGEAR, and the NETGEAR Logo are trademarks of NETGEAR, Inc. Any non-NETGEAR trademarks are used for reference purposes only.
Revision History
Publication
Part Number
Publish Date
202-11745-04 July 2018
Comments
202-11745-03 May 2018
Removed section on using the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to access the switch and made other minor changes or corrections.
Added
Chapter 4, Configuring Routing
Made other minor changes or corrections.
202-11745-02 January 2018 Added or made major changes to the following sections:
•
Switch Management Options and Default Management Mode
•
Determine the Switch IP Address Through the NETGEAR Switch Discovery
Tool and Access the Switch On-Network on page 16
•
Change the Management Mode of the Switch
•
Manage the Bonjour Settings and View Bonjour Information
•
Made other minor changes and corrections.
202-11745-01 September 2017 First publication
2
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Switch Management Options and Default Management Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Web Browser Requirements and Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Change the Management Mode of the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Change the Management Mode to Direct Connect
Change the Management Mode Back to NETGEAR Insight
Chapter 2 Configure System Information
View and Configure the Switch Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and
Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Manage the Bonjour Settings and View Bonjour Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
View the LLDP-MED Network Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Configure the LLDP-MED Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure DHCP L2 Relay and DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chapter 3 Configure Switching
Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
View, Search, and Configure the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View and Search the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Configure Global Layer 2 Loop Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection on a Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chapter 4 Configuring Routing
Configure the IPv6 Global Routing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Configure IPv6 VLAN Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Manage IPv6 Prefixes for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Configure VLAN Routing With the VLAN Routing Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Remove ARP Entries From the ARP Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Chapter 5 Configure Quality of Service
Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
5
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure the DiffServ Service Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Chapter 6 Manage Device Security
Reset the Password to the Default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
View or Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Configure Rules for an Extended IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
View or Delete IP ACL Bindings in the IP ACL Binding Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
6
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Chapter 7 Perform Maintenance Tasks
Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Download a File to the Switch Using TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Chapter 8 Manage Power over Ethernet
Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Specify the Settings for an Absolute PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Specify the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Change the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . 360
Chapter 9 Monitor the System
7
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Appendix A Configuration Examples
Standard IP ACL Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Appendix B Hardware Specifications and Default Values
8
1.
Getting Started
1
This manual describes how you can configure and monitor the following NETGEAR Insight managed switches by using the local browser–based management interface:
• GC110
. 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Insight Managed Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber
Ports
• GC110P
. 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE Insight Managed Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP
Fiber Ports
• GC510P
. 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Insight Managed Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP
Fiber Ports
• GC510PP
. 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet High-Power PoE+ Insight Managed Smart Cloud
Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
This chapter contains the following sections:
•
Switch Management Options and Default Management Mode
•
•
Web Browser Requirements and Supported Browsers
•
•
•
•
Change the Management Mode of the Switch
•
•
How to Configure Interface Settings
•
Local Browser Interface Device View
In this manual, we refer to all switch models as
the switch
. Unless noted otherwise, all information applies to all switch models.
For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the support website at
netgear.com/support
.
Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are automatically made available through the
Insight app and, if selected, pushed straight from the cloud to the device. If you are not using the
Insight app to manage your device, you can manually download and install the latest firmware by visiting
downloadcenter.netgear.com
. If the features or behavior of your product does not match what is described in this manual, you might need to update your firmware.
9
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Switch Management Options and Default Management
Mode
If you prefer, you can use the switch as a plug-and-play device, so you do not need to set up a custom configuration. Just connect power, connect to your network and to your other devices, and you’re done.
The switch is designed for management by the NETGEAR Insight app on a smartphone or tablet. Alternatively, you can manage the switch from the Insight Cloud portal that is available from a web browser on your Windows-based computer, Mac, or tablet. By default, the local browser interface is disabled and you cannot use it while the switch is managed by the
NETGEAR Insight app or Insight Cloud portal.
The switch provides management options that let you discover the switch on the network and configure, monitor, and control the switch:
• NETGEAR Insight app
. Using the NETGEAR Insight app, you can discover the switch on the network and add the switch to the NETGEAR Insight app so that you can set up the switch in the network and manage and monitor the switch remotely from your smartphone.You can choose from four methods to add the switch to the NETGEAR
Insight app: You can scan your network for the switch, scan the QR code or the barcode of the switch, or add the serial number of the switch. For more information, visit
netgear.com/insight
and see the NETGEAR knowledge base articles at
netgear.com/support
.
• Insight Cloud portal
. Using the NETGEAR Insight Cloud portal, you can set up the switch in the network, perform advanced remote setup, configuration, and management, monitor the switch, analyze the switch and network usage, and, if necessary, troubleshoot the switch and the network.
• Local browser interface
. By default, the management mode of the switch is set to
NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal. With this setting you can manage the switch using the Insight app or the Insight Cloud portal. For complex tasks such as integrating with an existing network of devices that are not managed through Insight, and for debugging purposes, you can change the management mode of the switch to Direct
Connect Web-browser Interface and access the local browser interface. In this mode, you can change the settings of the specific device, but we recommend that you do not use this mode to change settings that are Insight manageable because they would not be synchronized with Insight or to the network location and other devices to which you assigned the switch.
Note:
Changes to Insight-manageable settings from the local browser interface might also create conflicts with the rest of the
Insight-managed network to which the device is connected. While you manage the switch with the local browser interface, you cannot use the Insight app or Insight Cloud portal. To reenable management of
Getting Started
10
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
the device remotely or through the cloud, you can return the management mode to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight
Cloud Portal at any time so that you can manage the switch with the
Insight app or Insight Cloud portal.
To use the local browser interface method, after you connect the switch to your network, you must change the management method to Direct Connect Web-browser Interface (see
Change the Management Mode of the Switch
Available Publications
The following guides are available at
downloadcenter.netgear.com
:
•
Installation Guide
•
Hardware Installation Guide
For information about the NETGEAR Insight app, visit
netgear.com/insight
and see the
NETGEAR knowledge base articles at
netgear.com/support
.
Web Browser Requirements and Supported Browsers
To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software requirements:
•
HTML version 4.0, or later
•
HTTP version 1.1, or later
The following browsers were tested and support the local browser interface. Later browser versions might function fine but were not tested. The following web browsers are supported:
•
Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) version 11
•
Microsoft Edge
•
Mozilla Firefox versions 59.0.3
•
Chrome version 66.0.3359.139
•
Safari on Mac OS 10.1.2 (12603.3.8)
Getting Started
11
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
User-Defined Fields
In the local browser interface, user-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted in the field label on the configuration page. All alphanumeric and special characters can be used except for the following (unless specifically noted for that feature):
Table 1. Disallowed characters in user-defined fields
/
*
\
Character Definition
Backslash
?
Forward slash
Asterisk
Question mark
|
>
Character Definition
< Less than
Greater than
Pipe
Interface Naming Conventions
The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and the interface number. For all models, the physical ports include eight Gigabit Ethernet ports and two SFP fiber ports. The ports are numbered on the front panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the software.
The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.
Table 2. Naming conventions for interfaces
Interface
Physical
Link aggregation group (LAG)
Description
The physical ports include gigabit ports and are numbered sequentially starting from 1 using the following format: gY.
g is for a 1G port and Y is the port number.
LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are used only for bridging functions.
Example
g1, g2, g8 l1, l2, l4
CPU management interface
This is the internal switch interface responsible for the switch base
MAC address. This interface is not configurable and is always listed in the MAC Address Table.
CPU
Getting Started
12
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Access the Switch
When you use the local browser interface, for easiest access, we recommend that you cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that assigns IP addresses, power on the switch, and then use a computer that is connected to the same network as the switch
(on-network, see
It is also possible to configure the switch connected directly only to the computer that you are
using to configure it, and not connected to the network (off-network, see
Access the Switch On-Network
The DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default, allowing a DHCP server on the network
(or router that functions as a DHCP server) to assign an IP address to the switch.
If the switch is connected to a network, you can use
one
of the following methods to determine the IP address of the switch and access the switch:
• Use a Windows-based computer
Access the Switch On-Network from a
• Use a Mac
. See
Access the Switch On-Network from a Mac Using Bonjour
• Use the NETGEAR Insight app
. See
Determine the Switch IP Address Using the
NETGEAR Insight App and Access the Switch On-Network
• Access the DHCP server
Determine the Switch IP Address From the DHCP Server and Access the Switch On-Network
• Use an IP scanner utility
. See
Determine the Switch IP Address Through an IP Scanner and Access the Switch On-Network
Access the Switch On-Network from a Windows-Based Computer
To use a Windows-based computer and web browser to access the switch that is connected to a network:
1.
Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.
2.
Power on the switch.
The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.
3.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.
4.
Open Windows Explorer.
5.
Click the
Network
link.
6.
If prompted, enable the Network Discovery feature.
7.
Under Network Infrastructure, locate the switch model number.
The model number can be GC110, GC110P, GC510P, or GC510PP.
Getting Started
13
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
8.
Double-click
GCmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)
(where GCmodel is the model number of your switch and xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx is the MAC address of the switch).
The login page of the local browser interface opens.
9.
Enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
10.
Click the
Login
button.
A notification displays.
11.
Click the
OK
button to close the notification.
The System Information page displays. The IP address of the switch displays on the
System Information page.
12.
Write down the IP address for future use.
13.
Select the
Direct Connect Web-browser Interface
radio button.
14.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.
15.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now available.
Access the Switch On-Network from a Mac Using Bonjour
If your Mac supports Bonjour, you can use the following procedure.
To use a Mac and web browser to access the switch that is connected to a network:
1.
Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.
2.
Power on the switch.
The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.
3.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.
4.
Open the Safari browser.
5.
Select
Safari > Preferences
.
Getting Started
14
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The General page displays.
6.
Click the
Advanced
tab.
The Advanced page displays.
7.
Select the
Include Bonjour in the Bookmarks Menu
check box.
8.
Close the Advanced page.
9.
Select
Bookmarks > Bonjour > GCmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)
(where GCmodel is the model number of your switch and xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx is the MAC address of the switch), or
Bookmarks > Bonjour > Webpages GCmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)
depending on your
Mac OS version.
The login page of the local browser interface opens.
10.
Enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
11.
Click the
Login
button.
A notification displays.
12.
Click the
OK
button to close the notification.
The System Information page displays. The IP address of the switch displays on the
System Information page.
13.
Write down the IP address for future use.
14.
Select the
Direct Connect Web-browser Interface
radio button.
15.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.
16.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now available.
Determine the Switch IP Address From the DHCP Server and Access the
Switch On-Network
For information about how to access the DHCP server (or router that functions as a DHCP server) in your network, see the documentation for your DHCP server (or router).
Getting Started
15
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To access the DHCP server and use a web browser to access the switch that is connected to a network:
1.
Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.
2.
Power on the switch.
The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.
3.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.
4.
Access the DHCP server and view the IP address assigned to the switch.
5.
Write down the IP address for future use.
6.
Launch a web browser.
7.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
8.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
9.
Click the
Login
button.
A notification displays.
10.
Click the
OK
button to close the notification.
The System Information page displays.
11.
Select the
Direct Connect Web-browser Interface
radio button.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.
13.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now available.
Getting Started
16
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Determine the Switch IP Address Using the NETGEAR Insight App and Access the Switch On-Network
To use the NETGEAR Insight app and a web browser to access the switch that is connected to a network:
1.
On your iOS or Android mobile device, go to the app store, search for NETGEAR
Insight, and download the app.
2.
If the switch is directly connected to a WiFi router or access point, connect your mobile device to the WiFi network of the router or access point.
3.
Open the NETGEAR Insight app.
4.
Select
LOG IN
to log in to your existing NETGEAR account or tap the
CREATE NETGEAR
ACCOUNT
button to create a new account.
5.
After you log in to your account, name your network and specify a device admin password that applies to all devices that you add to this network.
When you are done, tap the
NEXT
button.
6.
You can now add the switch. Choose one of the following options:
•
Tap
Switch
as the device type and follow the prompts to scan the network.
•
Scan the QR code.
•
Scan the serial number bar code.
•
Type in the serial number.
Note:
Screens might display and suggest that you connect the switch to power and to an uplink. Since the switch is already connected to your network, on these screens, tap the
NEXT
button.
7.
If the switch is not yet connected to the same WiFi network as your mobile device, connect it now to the same WiFi network, wait two minutes, and then tap the
NEXT
button.
The IP address of the switch displays in the device list.
8.
Write down the IP address for future use.
9.
Launch a web browser.
10.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
11.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. Because you added the switch to a network on the
Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
12.
Click the
Login
button.
A notification displays.
13.
Click the
OK
button to close the notification.
Getting Started
17
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
14.
Select the
Direct Connect Web-browser Interface
radio button.
15.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.
16.
When prompted, enter the password.
Because you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now available.
Determine the Switch IP Address Through an IP Scanner and Access the
Switch On-Network
IP scanner utilities are available free of charge on the Internet.
To use an IP scanner utility and web browser to access the switch that is connected to a network:
1.
Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.
2.
Power on the switch.
The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.
3.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.
4.
Using the IP scanner utility, scan your network for the IP address assigned to the switch.
5.
Write down the IP address for future use.
6.
Launch a web browser.
7.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
8.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
9.
Click the
Login
button.
A notification displays.
10.
Click the
OK
button to close the notification.
Getting Started
18
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
11.
Select the
Direct Connect Web-browser Interface
radio button.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.
13.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now available.
Access the Switch Off-Network
The default IP address of the switch is 192.168.0.239. The IP address of the computer that you use to access the switch off-network must in the same subnet as the default IP address of the switch.
To use your web browser to configure a switch that is not connected to a network:
1.
Record your computer’s TCP/IP configuration settings, and then configure the computer with a static IP address of 192.168.0.210 and 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask.
Note:
If you are unsure how to do this, visit
netgear.com/search-support.aspx
and search for the following:
How to set a static IP address in Windows
or
Setting a static IP address on your network adapter in Mac OS
2.
Plug the switch into a power outlet and then connect your computer to the switch using an
Ethernet cable.
You can connect the Ethernet cable to any Ethernet port on the switch.
3.
Open a web browser, and enter
http://192.168.0.239
.
This is the default address of the switch.
4.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
5.
Click the
Login
button.
A notification displays.
Getting Started
19
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
Click the
OK
button to close the notification.
The System Information page displays.
7.
Select the
Direct Connect Web-browser Interface
radio button.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The System Information page closes, any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server, and the login window displays again.
9.
When prompted, enter the password.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now available.
10.
After you complete the configuration of the switch, reconfigure the computer that you used for this process to its original TCP/IP settings.
You can now connect your switch to your network using an Ethernet cable.
Change the Management Mode of the Switch
By default, the management mode on the switch is NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight
Cloud Portal. With this setting you can manage the switch using the Insight app or the Insight
Cloud portal. The first time that you log in to the switch’s local browser interface, you must change the management mode to Direct Connect Web-browser Interface (which is the same as the local browser interface). You can also change the management mode back to
NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal, which also reenables supports for the Insight Cloud portal.
Note the following about changing the management mode:
• Changing to Direct Connect Web-browser Interface
. The NETGEAR Insight app management mode becomes disabled and the current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server. Any changes that you make using the Direct
Connect Web-browser Interface management mode are not saved to the cloud server.
• Changing back to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before, all Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last configuration saved on the cloud server, including the switch password (that is, the password is reset to the Insight network password).
Getting Started
20
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Change the Management Mode to Direct Connect
Web-browser Interface
Note:
If you already accessed the local browser interface (see
on page 13), you can skip this section.
To change the management mode of the switch to Direct Connect Web-browser
Interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
Password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select the
Direct Connect Web-browser Interface
radio button.
6.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved. The System Information page closes and the login window displays again.
Any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server.
7.
Enter the switch’s password in the
Password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays and the full local browser interface is now available.
Getting Started
21
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Change the Management Mode Back to NETGEAR Insight
Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal
To change the management mode of the switch back to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
Password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select the
NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal
radio button.
6.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved. The System Information page closes and the login page displays again. (You can close the login page.)
The switch connects to the cloud server. If you added the switch to a network on the
Insight app before, all Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last configuration saved on the cloud server, including the switch password (that is, the password is reset to the Insight network password)
Register the Switch
To qualify for product updates and product warranty, we encourage you to register your product. The first time you log in to the switch, you are given the option of registering with
NETGEAR. Registration confirms that your email alerts work, lowers technical support resolution time, and ensures that your shipping address accuracy. We would also like to incorporate your feedback into future product development. We never sell or rent your email address and you can opt out of communications at any time.
If you use the Insight app, after the app discovers the switch and you add it to a network using the NETGEAR Insight app, the switch is automatically registered to your MyNETGEAR account. This registration process is also referred to as claiming. For information about the
NETGEAR Insight app, see the NETGEAR knowledge base articles at
netgear.com/support
.
Getting Started
22
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If you do not claim (register) the device and add it to an Insight network using the Insight app, you can manually register the switch using the local browser interface as described in the following procedure or you can visit he NETGEAR website for registration at
https://my.netgear.com/register/register.aspx
.
To register the switch through the local browser interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
5.
Select
Help > Registration
.
The Product Registration page displays.
6.
Click the
Register
button.
A NETGEAR web page opens.
7.
Follow the prompts online.
How to Configure Interface Settings
For some features you can apply the same settings simultaneously to any of the following:
•
A single port
•
Multiple ports
•
All ports
•
A single LAG
•
Multiple LAGs
•
All LAGs
•
Multiple ports and LAGs
•
All ports and LAGs
Many of the pages that allow you to configure or view interface settings include links to display all ports, all LAGs, or all ports and LAGs on the page.
Getting Started
23
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Use these links as follows:
•
To display all ports, click the
1
link. The LAGs are not displayed.
•
To display all LAGs, click the
LAGS
link. The ports are not displayed.
•
To display all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
The procedures in this section describe how to select the ports and LAGs to configure. The procedures assume that you are already logged in to the switch. If you do not know how to log in to the switch, see
To configure a single port or LAG:
1.
Click the
All
link to display the all ports and LAGs.
2.
Do one of the following:
a.
In the
Go To Interface
field, type the port number and click the
Go
button.
For example, type
g4
for a port or type
l3
for a LAG. For more information, see
The check box for the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number displays in the heading row.
b.
Select the check box for the port or LAG.
The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number displays in the heading row.
3.
Configure the desired settings.
4.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
To configure multiple ports and LAGs:
1.
Click the
All
link to display all ports and LAGs.
2.
Select the check box next to each port and LAG to configure.
The row for each selected interface is highlighted.
3.
Configure the desired settings.
4.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
To configure all ports and LAGs:
1.
Click the
All
link to display all ports and LAGs.
2.
Select the check box in the heading row.
The check boxes for all ports and LAGs are selected and the rows for all ports and LAGs are highlighted.
Getting Started
24
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
3.
Configure the desired settings.
4.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Local Browser Interface Device View
The Device View page in the local-only mode browser interface displays the ports and system LEDs on the switch. This graphic provides an alternate way to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic also provides information about device ports, current configuration and status, tables, feature components, and LED status.
To use the Device View:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Device View
.
The previous figure shows the Device View page for model GC510P.
The port color indicates the port status:
• Green
. The port is linking up.
• Red
. An error occurred on the port or the port is administratively disabled.
• Black
. No link is present.
The left port LED indicates the connection, speed, and traffic status:
Getting Started
25
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Solid gray
. The port is not connected. This is the default state.
• Solid green
. The port is operating at its maximum speed.
• Blinking green
. The port is transmitting or receiving traffic at its maximum speed
• Solid amber
The port is operating at below its maximum speed.
• Blinking amber
. The port is transmitting or receiving traffic below its maximum speed.
The right port LED indicates the PoE status (does not apply to model GC110):
• Off
. The port is not delivering PoE power.
• Solid green
. The port is delivering PoE power.
• Solid amber
. A PoE fault occurred.
The system LEDs indicate the following status:
•
Cloud LED:
Solid blue
. The switch is connected to the cloud server and is set up to be managed by the NETGEAR Insight app.
Off
. The switch is not connected to the cloud server or is set up to be managed by the local browser interface.
•
PoE Max LED (does not apply to model GC110):
Off
. Sufficient (more than 7W of) PoE power is available.
Solid amber
. Less than 7W of PoE power is available.
Blinking amber
. At least once during the previous two minutes, less than 7W of
PoE power was available.
•
Fan LED (model GC510PP only):
Solid green
. The fan is operating normally.
Solid amber
. A problem occurred with the fan.
6.
To see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options, right-click on a port.
Getting Started
26
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The previous figure shows the Device View page for model GC510P.
7.
To display the main menu that contains the same options as the navigation menu at the top of the page, right-click the graphic without clicking a specific port.
The previous figure shows the Device View page for model GC510P.
8.
To return to the Device View page, select
System > Device View
from the System
Information page.
Getting Started
27
2.
Configure System Information
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
View and Configure the Switch Management Settings
•
Manage the Bonjour Settings and View Bonjour Information
•
•
•
•
Configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol
•
Configure DHCP L2 Relay and DHCP Snooping
•
2
28
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View and Configure the Switch Management Settings
This section describes how to display the switch status and specify some basic switch information, such as the management interface IP address, system clock settings, and DNS information. The following sections describe how you can configure the switch management settings:
•
View or Define System Information
•
•
Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and Management VLAN
•
Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface
•
View the IPv6 Network Neighbor
•
•
Configure Denial of Service Settings
•
•
Configure Green Ethernet Settings
View or Define System Information
When you log in, the System Information page displays. You can configure and view general device information.
To view or define system information:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
29
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Define the following fields:
• System Name
. Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
• System Location
. Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
• System Contact
. Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
6.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the status information that the System Information page displays.
Table 3. System Information
Field
Product Name
Serial Number
Date & Time
System Up Time
Base Mac Address
Temp (C)
Temperature traps range
Description
The product name of this switch.
The serial number of the switch.
The current date and time.
The time in days, hours, and minutes since the last switch reboot.
Universally assigned hardware address of the switch.
The general temperature of the switch in degrees Centigrade.
Identifies the minimum and maximum traps range.
Configure System Information
30
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View the Temperature Sensor Information
You can view the current temperature of the temperature sensors. The temperature is instant and can be updated with the latest information about the switch when you click the
Refresh
button. The maximum temperature of the temperature sensors depends on the actual hardware.
To view temperature information:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Scroll down to the Temperature Sensors section.
6.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Temperature Sensors information.
Table 4. Temperature Sensors information
Field
Sensor
Description
Temp(C)
State
Max Temp (C)
Description
The temperature sensor for the switch.
The description of the temperature sensor.
The temperature of the switch in degrees Centigrade.
The switch temperature state.
The maximum temperature value of CPU. If the switch exceeds this limit, it shuts down.
Configure System Information
31
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View the Fan Status
Note:
The fan status information is available for model GC510PP only.
You can view the status of the fans. These fans remove the heat generated by the power,
CPU, and other components, and allow the switch to function normally.
To view the fan status:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Scroll down to the Fans section.
The fan information displays.
6.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fan status information.
Table 5. Fan status
Field
FAN
Description
Type
Speed
Duty level(%)
State
Description
The fan index used to identify the fan for the switch. (The index is 1.)
The description of the temperature sensor.
Specifies whether the fan module is fixed or removable.
The fan speed.
The duty level of the fan.
Specifies whether the fan is operational.
Configure System Information
32
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View the Power Supplies
You can view s the status of the power supplies.
To view the power supplies status:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Scroll down to the Power supplies section.
6.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Power supplies information.
Table 6. Power supplies status
Field
Power supply
Description
Type
State
Description
The power supply index used for the switch.
The description of the power supply.
Specifies whether the power module is fixed or removable.
Specifies the state of the power module.
View the Software Versions
You can view the software versions that are running on the switch.
To view the software versions:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
Configure System Information
33
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Scroll down to the Versions section.
6.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Versions section of the System Information page.
Table 7. Versions information
Field
Model Name
Boot Version
Software Version
Description
The model name of the switch.
The version of the bootloader software of the switch.
The version number of the code currently running on the switch.
View the Switch CPU Status
You can monitor the CPU, memory resources, and utilization patterns across various intervals to assess the performance, load, and stability parameters.
To view the switch CPU status:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Configure System Information
34
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > System CPU Status > System CPU Status
.
The CPU Utilization section shows the memory information, task-related information, and percentage of CPU utilization per task.
The following table describes CPU Memory Status information.
Table 8. CPU Memory Status information
Field
Total System Memory
Available Memory
Description
The total memory of the switch in KBytes.
The available memory space for the switch in KBytes.
Configure System Information
35
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure the CPU Thresholds
The CPU utilization threshold notification feature allows you to configure thresholds that, when exceeded, trigger a notification. The notification occurs through SNMP trap and syslog messages.
To configure the CPU thresholds:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > System CPU Status > CPU Threshold
.
The CPU Threshold page displays.
6.
Specify the thresholds:
• Rising Threshold
. Notification is generated when the total CPU utilization exceeds this threshold value over the configured time period. The range is 1 to 100.
• Rising Interval
. This utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 to
86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.
• Falling Threshold
. Notification is triggered when the total CPU utilization falls below this level for a configured period of time.
The falling utilization threshold must be equal to or less than the rising threshold value. The falling utilization threshold notification is sent only if a rising threshold notification was sent previously. Configuring the falling utilization threshold and time period is optional. If the Falling CPU utilization parameters are not configured, the parameters automatically get the same values as the Rising CPU utilization parameters. The range is 1 to 100.
• Falling Interval
. The utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 seconds to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.
• Free Memory Threshold
. The free memory threshold value for the CPU in KB.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
36
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and
Management VLAN
You can configure network information for the network interface, which is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s ports. You also use the IPv4 address of the network interface to connect to the switch through the local browser interface. The configuration parameters that is associated with the switch’s network interface do not affect the configuration of the ports through which traffic is switched.
To configure the IPv4 address for the network interface and the management VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > IP Configuration
.
The IP Configuration page displays.
6.
Select a radio button to specify how the network information for the switch management interface must be configured:
• Static IP Address
. Specifies that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway must be manually configured. Enter this information in the fields below this radio button.
• Dynamic IP Address (BOOTP)
. Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address through a BootP server.
• Dynamic IP Address
. Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address through a
DHCP server. This is the default setting. By default, the DHCP client is enabled.
7.
If you select the
Static IP Address
radio button, configure the following network information:
• IP Address
. The IP address of the network interface. The default is 192.168.0.239.
Each part of the IP address must start with a number other than zero. For example, IP addresses 001.100.192.6 and 192.001.10.3 are not valid.
• Subnet Mask
. The IP subnet mask for the interface. The default value is
255.255.255.0.
Configure System Information
37
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Default Gateway
. The default gateway for the IP interface. The default value is
192.168.0.254.
8.
Specify the VLAN ID for the management VLAN.
The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a computer that is connected to a port in the same VLAN. If not specified, the active management VLAN ID is 1 (default), which allows an IP connection to be established through any port.
When the management VLAN is set to a different value, an IP connection can be made only through a port that is part of the management VLAN. Also, the port VLAN ID (PVID) of the port to be connected in that management VLAN must be the same as the management VLAN ID.
Note:
Make sure that the VLAN that you want to assign as the management
VLAN exists. Also make sure that the PVID of at least one port in the
VLAN is the same as the management VLAN ID. For information about creating VLANs and configuring the PVID for a port, see
The following requirements apply to the management VLAN:
•
Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.
•
When a new management VLAN is configured, connectivity through the existing management VLAN is lost.
•
The management station must be reconnected to the port in the new management
VLAN.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface
You can configure the IPv6 address for the network interface, which is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel ports.
You also use the IPv6 address of the network interface to connect to the switch through the local browser interface. The configuration parameters that is associated with the switch’s network interface do not affect the configuration of the ports through which traffic is switched.
To access the switch over an IPv6 network, you must initially configure the switch with IPv6 information (IPv6 prefix, prefix length, and default gateway). IPv6 can be configured using any of the following options:
•
IPv6 auto-configuration
•
DHCPv6
Configure System Information
38
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
When in-band connectivity is established, you can change the IPv6 information through the local browser interface.
To configure the IPv6 address for the network interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > IPv6 Network Configuration
.
The IPv6 Network Global Configuration page displays.
6.
Ensure that the Admin Mode
Enable
radio button is selected.
7.
Determine how the switch acquires an IPv6 address:
• IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Mode
. When this mode is enabled, the network interface can acquire an IPv6 address through IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol
(NDP) and through the use of router advertisement messages. When this mode is disabled, the network interface does not use the native IPv6 address autoconfiguration feature to acquire an IPv6 address. Autoconfiguration can be enabled only when DHCPv6 is not enabled on any of the management interfaces.
• DHCPv6
. Next to Current Network Configuration Protocol, select the
DHCPv6
radio button to enable the DHCPv6 client on the interface. The switch attempts to acquire network information from a DHCPv6 server. Selecting the
None
radio button disables the DHCPv6 client on the network interface. When DHCPv6 is enabled, the DHCPv6
Client DUID field displays the client identifier used by the DHCPv6 client (if enabled) when sending messages to the DHCPv6 server.
8.
In the
IPv6 Gateway
field, specify the IPv6 address for the default gateway for the network interface.
The gateway address is in IPv6 global or link-local address format.
9.
To configure one or more static IPv6 addresses for the network interface, do the following:
a.
In the
IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length
field, specify the static IPv6 prefix and prefix to the
IPv6 network interface.
The address is in the global address format.
Configure System Information
39
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports b.
In the
EUI64
menu, select
True
to enable the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI) flag for IPv6 address, or select
False
to omit the EUI flag.
c.
Click the
Add
button.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
View the IPv6 Network Neighbor
You can view information about the IPv6 neighbors that the switch discovers through the
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP).
To view the IPv6 neighbor table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > IPv6 Network Neighbor
.
The IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table page displays.
The following table describes the information the IPv6 Network Neighbor page displays about each IPv6 neighbor that the switch discovered.
Table 9. IPv6 network interface neighbor table information
Field
IPv6 address
MAC address
IsRtr
Description
The IPv6 address of a neighbor switch visible to the network interface.
The MAC address of a neighbor switch.
• true (1)
. The neighbor machine is a router.
• false (2)
. The neighbor machine is not a router.
Configure System Information
40
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 9. IPv6 network interface neighbor table information (continued)
Field
Neighbor State
Last Updated
Description
The state of the neighboring switch:
• reachable (1)
. The neighbor is reachable from the switch.
• stale (2)
. Information about the neighbor is scheduled for deletion.
• delay (3)
. No information was received from the neighbor during the delay period.
• probe (4)
. The switch is attempting to probe the neighbor.
• unknown (5)
. Unknown status.
The last time that the neighbor information was updated.
Configure the Time Settings
The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name suggests, it is a less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for synchronizing the clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is handled through the
Internet. You can also set the system time manually.
Configure the Time Setting Manually
You can view and adjust date and time settings.
To manually configure the time setting:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > Time Configuration
.
The Time Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the Clock Source
Local
radio button.
7.
In the
Date
field, specify the current date in months, days, and years (MM/DD/YYYY).
8.
In the
Time
field, specify the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds (HH:MM:SS).
Configure System Information
41
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Note:
If you do not enter a date and time, the switch calculates the date and time using the CPU’s clock cycle.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the Time Settings With SNTP
To configure the time by using SNTP:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > Time Configuration
.
The Time Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the Clock Source
SNTP
radio button.
The page refreshes and displays the SNTP Global Configuration section and the SNTP
Global Status section.
The default is SNTP. The local clock can be set to SNTP only if the following two conditions are met:
•
The SNTP server is configured.
•
The SNTP last attempt status is successful.
7.
Next to Client Mode, select the mode of operation of the SNTP client:
• Disable
. SNTP is not operational. No SNTP requests are sent from the client nor are any incoming SNTP messages processed.
• Unicast
. SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative to the server.
Configure System Information
42
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Broadcast
. SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address provides a single-subnet scope while a multicast address provides an Internet-wide scope.
The default value is Disable.
8.
If the SNTP client mode is
Unicast
, use the SNTP Server Configuration page to add the IP address or DNS name of one or more SNTP servers for the switch to poll.
For more information, see
9.
In the
Port
field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.
The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and 123. The default value is 123. When the default value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is assigned by the operating system.
10.
In the
Unicast Poll Interval
field, specify the number of seconds between unicast poll requests expressed as a power of 2. to The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.
11.
In the
Broadcast Poll Interval
field, specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll requests expressed as a power of 2.
Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is
6 to 10. The default value is 6.
12.
In the
Unicast Poll Timeout
field, specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP response to a unicast poll request.
The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.
13.
In the
Unicast Poll Retry
field, specify the number of times to retry a unicast poll request to an SNTP server after the first time-out before the switch attempts to use the next configured server.
The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.
14.
In the
Time Zone Name
field, specify a time zone.
You can also specify the number of hours and number of minutes that the time zone is different from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.
Note:
When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock, the time data received from the server is based on the UTC, which is the same as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time zone in which the switch is located.
15.
In the
Offset Hours
field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different from
UTC.
See the description for Time Zone Name in
for more information. The allowed range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.
16.
In the
Offset Minutes
field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is different from UTC.
Configure System Information
43
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
See the description for Time Zone Name in
for more information. The allowed range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.
17.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Modify the Global SNTP Settings
To modify the global SNTP settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > Time Configuration
.
The Time Configuration page displays.
If the clock source is SNTP, the SNTP Global Configuration section displays below the
Time Configuration section.
6.
Select a
Client mode
radio button to specify the mode of operation of the SNTP client:
• Disable
. SNTP is not operational. No SNTP requests are sent from the client and no received SNTP messages are processed.
• Unicast
. SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative to the server.
• Broadcast
. SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address provides a single-subnet scope while a multicast address provides an Internet-wide scope.
The default value is Unicast.
7.
In the
Port
field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.
Configure System Information
44
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and the value 123. The default value is 123. When the default value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is assigned by the operating system.
8.
In the
Unicast Poll Interval
field, specify the number of seconds between unicast poll requests expressed as a power of 2.
The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.
9.
In the
Broadcast Poll Interval
field, specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll requests expressed as a power of 2.
Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is
6 to 10. The default value is 6.
10.
In the
Unicast Poll Timeout
field, specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP response to a unicast poll request.
The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.
11.
In the
Unicast Poll Retry
field, specify the number of times to retry a unicast poll request to an SNTP server after the first time-out before the switch attempts to use the next configured server.
The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.
12.
In the
Time Zone Name
field, specify a time zone.
You can also specify the number of hours and number of minutes that the time zone is different from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.
Note:
When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock, the time data received from the server is based on the UTC, which is the same as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time zone in which the switch is located.
13.
In the
Offset Hours
field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different from
UTC.
The allowed range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.
14.
In the
Offset Minutes
field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is different from UTC.
The allowed range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.
15.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
16.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
Configure System Information
45
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View SNTP Global Status
When you select the SNTP option as the clock source, the SNTP global status is displayed below the SNTP Global Configuration section of the page. The SNTP Global Status table displays information about the system’s SNTP client.
To view SNTP global status:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration
.
The Time Configuration page displays.
If the clock source is SNTP, the SNTP Global Status section displays below the SNTP
Global Configuration section.
6.
Click the
Refresh
button to update the page with the latest information about the switch.
The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.
Table 10. SNTP Global Status information
Field
Version
Supported mode
Last Update Time
Last Attempt Time
Description
The SNTP version that the client supports.
The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be supported by a client.
The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the system clock.
The local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt of an unsolicited message.
Configure System Information
46
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 10. SNTP Global Status information (continued)
Field
Last Attempt Status
Server IP Address
Address Type
Description
The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of
Other
is displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes.
• Other
. The status of the last request is unknown.
• Success
. The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.
• Request Timed Out
. After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server, the response timer expired before a response from the server was received.
• Bad Date Encoded
. The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.
• Version Not Supported
. The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client.
• Server Unsynchronized
. The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This is indicated by the leap indicator field in the SNTP message.
• Server Kiss Of Death
. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to
0 in a message received from a server.
The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no message was received from any server, an empty string is shown.
The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid packet.
Server Stratum
Reference Clock ID
Server mode
Unicast Server Max Entries
The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.
The reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.
The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.
The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this client.
Unicast Server Current Entries The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client.
Broadcast Count The number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that were received and processed by the SNTP client since the last reboot.
Configure an SNTP Server
SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.
Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. The switch operates only as an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.
Time sources are established by strata. Strata define the accuracy of the reference clock.
The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The device receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.
Configure System Information
47
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following is an example of strata:
• Stratum 0
. A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.
• Stratum 1
. A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1 time servers provide primary network time standards.
• Stratum 2
. The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.
For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from a Stratum 1 server.
Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server type.
SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:
• T1
. Time that the original request was sent by the client.
• T2
. Time that the original request was received by the server.
• T3
. Time that the server sent a reply.
• T4
. Time that the client received the server's reply.
The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.
Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.
SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.
The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or at every poll interval.
You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol
SNTP servers.
Add an SNTP Server
To add an SNTP server:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure System Information
48
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration
.
The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Server Type
menu, select the type of SNTP address to enter in the address field.
The address can be either an IP address (IPv4, IPv6) or a host name (DNS). The default value is IPv4.
7.
In the
Address
field, specify the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.
This is a text string of up to 64 characters, containing the encoded unicast IP address or host name of an SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this address is a DNS host name, then that host name is resolved into an IP address each time an SNTP request is sent to it.
8.
If the UDP port on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent is not the standard port (123), specify the port number in the
Port
field.
The valid range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.
9.
In
Priority
field, specify the priority order which to query the servers.
The SNTP client on the device continues sending SNTP requests to different servers until a successful response is received, or all servers are exhausted. The priority indicates the order in which to query the servers. The request is sent to an SNTP server with a priority value of 1 first, then to a server with a priority value of 2, and so on. If any servers are assigned the same priority, the SNTP client contacts the servers in the order that they appear in the table. The valid range is 1 to 3. The default value is 1.
10.
In the
Version
field, specify the NTP version running on the server.
The range is 1 to 4. The default value is 4.
11.
Click the
Add
button.
The SNTP server entry is added.
12.
Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.
You can configure up to three SNTP servers.
Configure System Information
49
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers configured on your switch. The following table describes the SNTP Server Global Status information.
Table 11. SNTP Server Status information
Field
Address
Last Update Time
Last Attempt Time
Last Attempt Status
Requests
Failed Requests
Description
All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a message stating that no SNTP server exists displays on the page.
The local date and time (UTC) that the response from the server was used to update the system clock.
The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP server was last queried.
The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of Other is displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes:
• Other
. The status of the last request is unknown, or no SNTP responses were received.
• Success
. The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.
• Request Timed Out
. After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server, the response timer expired before a response from the server was received.
• Bad Date Encoded
. The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.
• Version Not Supported
. The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client.
• Server Unsynchronized
. The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This is indicated by the leap indicator field on the SNTP message.
• Server Kiss Of Death
. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server.
The number of SNTP requests made to the server since the last reboot.
The number of failed SNTP requests made to the server since the last reboot.
Change the Settings for an Existing SNTP Server
To change the settings for an existing SNTP server:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure System Information
50
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration
.
The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the configured server.
7.
Specify new values in the available fields.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Remove an SNTP Server
To remove an SNTP server:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration
.
The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the configured server to remove.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The entry is removed, and the device is updated.
Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings
You can configure settings for summer time, which is also known as daylight saving time.
Used in some countries around the world, summer time is the practice of temporarily advancing clocks during the summer months. Typically clocks are adjusted forward one or more hours near the start of spring and are adjusted backward in autumn.
Configure System Information
51
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To configure the daylight saving time settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration
.
The DayLight Saving (DST) Configuration page displays.
6.
Select a Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:
• Disable
. Disable daylight saving time.
• Recurring
. Daylight saving time occurs at the same time every year. The start and end times and dates for the time shift must be manually configured.
• Recurring EU
. The system clock uses the standard recurring summer time settings used in countries in the European Union. When this option is selected, the rest of the applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.
• Recurring USA
. The system clock uses the standard recurring daylight saving time settings used in the United States. When this option is selected, the rest of the applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.
• Non Recurring
. Daylight saving time settings are in effect only between the start date and end date of the specified year. When this option is selected, the summer time settings do not repeat on an annual basis.
7.
Configure the settings for the selected daylight saving method by doing the following:
Configure System Information
52
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
If you select the DayLight Saving (DST)
Recurring
,
Recurring EU
, or
Recurring
USA
radio button, configure the settings that are shown in the following table.
Field
Begins At
Ends At
Offset
Zone
Description
These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.
• Week
. Configure the start week.
• Day
. Configure the start day.
• Month
. Configure the start month.
• Hours
. Configure the start hour.
• Minutes
. Configure the start minutes.
These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.
• Week
. Configure the end week.
• Day
. Configure the end day.
• Month
. Configure the end month.
• Hours
. Configure the end hour.
• Minutes
. Configure the end minutes.
Configure recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is 1–1440 minutes.
Configure the time zone.
•
If you select the DayLight Saving (DST)
Non Recurring
radio button, configure the settings that are shown in the following table.
Field
Begins At
Ends At
Offset
Zone
Description
These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.
• Month
. Configure the start month.
• Date
. Configure the start date.
• Year
. Configure the start year.
• Hours
. Configure the start hour.
• Minutes
. Configure the start minutes.
These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.
• Month
. Configure the end month.
• Date
. Configure the end date.
• Year
. Configure the end year.
• Hours
. Configure the end hour.
• Minutes
. Configure the end minutes.
Specify the number of minutes to shift the summer time from the standard time. The valid range is 1–1440 minutes.
Specify the acronym associated with the time zone when summer time is in effect.
This field is not validated against an official list of time zone acronyms.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
53
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View the DayLight Saving Time Status
The Daylight Saving (DST) Status section shows information about the summer time settings and whether the time shift for summer time is currently in effect.
To view the daylight saving time status:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration
.
The DayLight Saving (DST) Configuration page displays.
6.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table displays the nonconfigurable daylight saving status information.
Table 12. Daylight Saving (DST) Status information
Field
Daylight Saving (DST)
Begins At
Ends At
Offset (in Minutes)
Description
The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:
• Disable
• Recurring
• Recurring EU
• Recurring USA
• Non Recurring
The start date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.
The end date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.
The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.
Configure System Information
54
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 12. Daylight Saving (DST) Status information (continued)
Field
Zone
Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect
Description
The zone acronym. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.
Indicates whether daylight saving time is in effect.
Configure Denial of Service Settings
You can configure the Denial of Service (DoS) settings for the switch. The switch provides support for classifying and blocking specific types of DoS attacks.
Configure Auto-DoS
You can automatically enable all the DoS features available on the switch, except for the L4
Port attack. For information about the types of DoS attacks the switch can monitor and block, see
Configure Denial of Service
on page 56.
To enable the Auto-DoS feature:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Denial of Service > Auto-DoS Configuration
.
The Auto-DoS Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the Auto-DoS Mode
Enable
radio button.
When an attack is detected, a warning message is logged to the buffered log and is sent to the syslog server. At the same time, the port is shut down and can be enabled only manually by the admin user.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
55
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure Denial of Service
The Denial of Service Configuration page allows you to select which types of DoS attacks the switch monitors and blocks.
To configure individual DoS settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Denial of Service > Denial of Service Configuration
.
The Denial of Service Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the types of DoS attacks for the switch to monitor and block and configure any associated values:
• Denial of Service Min TCP Header Size
. Specify the minimum TCP header size allowed. If DoS TCP Fragment is enabled, the switch drops packets with a TCP header smaller than the configured value.
• Denial of Service ICMPv4
. Enabling ICMPv4 DoS prevention causes the switch to drop ICMPv4 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size greater than the configured ICMPv4 packet size.
• Denial of Service Max ICMPv4 Packet Size
. Specify the maximum ICMPv4 packet size allowed. If ICMPv4 DoS prevention is enabled, the switch drops IPv4 ICMP ping packets with a size greater than the configured value.
• Denial of Service ICMPv6
. Enabling ICMPv6 DoS prevention causes the switch to drop ICMPv6 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size greater than the configured ICMPv6 packet size.
• Denial of Service Max ICMPv6 Packet Size
. Specify the maximum IPv6 ICMP packet size allowed. If ICMPv6 DoS prevention is enabled, the switch drops IPv6
ICMP ping packets with a size greater than the configured maximum ICMPv6 packet size.
• Denial of Service First Fragment
. Enabling First Fragment DoS prevention causes the switch to check DoS options on first fragment IP packets when the switch receives fragmented IP packets. Otherwise, the switch ignores the first fragment IP packages.
Configure System Information
56
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Denial of Service ICMP Fragment
. Enabling ICMP Fragment DoS prevention causes the switch to drop ICMP fragmented packets.
• Denial of Service SIP=DIP
. Enabling SIP=DIP DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets with a source IP address equal to the destination IP address.
• Denial of Service SMAC=DMAC
. Enabling SMAC=DMAC DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets with a source MAC address equal to the destination MAC address.
• Denial of Service TCP FIN&URG&PSH
. Enabling TCP FIN & URG & PSH DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets with TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set and TCP sequence number equal to 0.
• Denial of Service TCP Flag&Sequence
. Enabling TCP Flag DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets with TCP control flags set to 0 and TCP sequence number set to 0.
• Denial of Service TCP Fragment
. Enabling TCP Fragment DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets with a TCP payload for which the IP payload length minus the IP header size is less than the minimum allowed TCP header size.
• Denial of Service TCP Offset
. Enabling TCP Offset DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets with a TCP header offset set to 1.
• Denial of Service TCP Port
. Enabling TCP Port DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets for which the TCP source port is equal to the TCP destination port.
• Denial of Service TCP SYN
. Enabling TCP SYN DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets with TCP flags SYN set.
• Denial of Service TCP SYN&FIN
. Enabling TCP SYN & FIN DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets with TCP flags SYN and FIN set.
• Denial of Service UDP Port
. Enabling UDP Port DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets for which the UDP source port is equal to the UDP destination port.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure DNS Settings
You can configure information about DNS servers that the network uses and how the switch operates as a DNS client.
Configure Global DNS Settings
You can configure global DNS settings and DNS server information.
To configure the global DNS settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
Configure System Information
57
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration
.
The DNS Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the
Disable
or
Enable
radio button to specify whether to disable or enable the administrative status of the DNS client.
• Enable
. Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS domain name. The DNS is enabled by default.
• Disable
. Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries.
7.
In the
DNS Default Name
field, enter the default DNS domain name to include in DNS queries.
When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear.com to resolve the name). The name must not be longer than 255 characters.
8.
In the
DNS Server
field, specify the IPv4 address to which the switch sends DNS queries.
9.
Click the
Add
button.
The server is added to the list. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The Preference field displays the server preference order. The preference is set in the order in which preferences were entered.
10.
To remove a DNS server from the list, select its check box and click the
Delete
button.
If you click the
Delete
button without selecting a DNS server, all the DNS servers are deleted.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
58
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.
Table 13. DNS Server Configuration information
Field
ID
Preference
Description
The identification of the DNS Server.
Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preferences are determined by the order in which they were entered.
Configure and View Host Name-to-IP Address Information
You can manually map host names to IP addresses or view dynamic host mappings.
Add a Static Entry to the Dynamic Host Mapping Table
To add a static entry to the local dynamic host mapping table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration
.
The Host Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
Host Name (1 to 255 characters)
field, specify the static host name to add.
Its length cannot exceed 255 characters and it is a required field.
7.
In the
IPv4/IPv6 Address
field, enter the IP address to associate with the host name.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The entry displays in the list on the page.
Configure System Information
59
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Remove an Entry From the Dynamic Host Mapping Table
To remove an entry from the dynamic host mapping table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration
.
The DNS Host Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the entry to remove.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
Change the Host Name or IP Address in an Entry of the Dynamic Host Mapping Table and
View All Entries
To change the host name or IP address in an entry of the dynamic host mapping table and view all entries:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
60
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration
.
The DNS Host Configuration page display.
6.
Select the check box next to the entry to update.
7.
Enter the new information in the appropriate field.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
9.
To clear all the dynamic host name entries from the list, click the
Clear
button.
The Dynamic Host Mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.
Table 14. Dynamic Host Mapping information
Field
Host
Total
Elapsed
Type
IPv4/IPv6 Address
Description
Lists the host name that you assign to the specified IP address.
Time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.
Time since the dynamic entry was last updated.
The type of the dynamic entry.
Lists the IP address that is associated with the host name.
Configure Green Ethernet Settings
You can configure the green Ethernet features to reduce power consumption.
To configure the Green Ethernet settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Configuration
.
Configure System Information
61
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The Green Ethernet Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the Auto Power Down Mode
Disable
or
Enable
radio button.
By default, this mode is disabled. When a port link is down, the underlying physical layer goes down for a short period and then checks for port link pulses again so that autonegotiation remains possible. In this way, the switch saves power when no link partner is present for the port.
7.
Select the EEE Mode
Disable
or
Enable
radio button.
By default, this mode is disabled. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC with a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined by the
IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded. Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings
You can configure per-port Green Ethernet settings.
To configure the Green Ethernet interface settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface
Configuration
.
The Green Ethernet Interface Configuration page displays.
Configure System Information
62
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
Do one of the following:
•
In the
Go To Interface
field, enter the port using the respective naming convention
(for example, g1 or l1), and click the
Go
button.
The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.
For more information about naming conventions, see
•
Select the port.
7.
Select the Auto Power Down Mode
Disable
or
Enable
radio button.
By default, this mode is disabled. When a port link is down, the underlying physical layer goes down for a short period and then checks for port link pulses again so that autonegotiation remains possible. In this way, the switch saves power when no link partner is present for the port.
8.
Select the EEE Mode
Disable
or
Enable
radio button.
By default, this mode is disabled. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC with a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined by the IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded.
Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Green Ethernet Local and Remote Devices
You can view detailed per-port green Ethernet information and enable or disable green
Ethernet settings on a single port. Using the green Ethernet features allows for power consumption savings.
To configure green Ethernet local and remote devices:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure System Information
63
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Details
.
The Green Ethernet Details page displays.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface.
7.
From the
EEE Admin mode
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
With the EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during a link idle condition. The default value is Disabled. If the EEE Admin Mode is not supported, N/A is displayed.
8.
In the
EEE Transmit Idle Time
field, enter the time after which switch transitions to the LPI state.
The range is 600 to 4294967295. The default value is 600.
9.
In the
EEE Transmit Wake Time
field, enter the time that the switch must wait before it transitions to the active state after it receives a packet for transmission.
The range is 8 to 65535. The default value is 17.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
11.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
12.
To clear the configuration, resetting all statistics for the selected interface to default values, click the
Clear
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 15. Green Ethernet Local Device Information
Field Description
Cumulative Energy Saved on this port due to Green mode(s) (Watts
* Hours)
Cumulative energy saved due to all green modes enabled on this port in watts * hours.
Rx Low Power Idle Event Count This field is incremented each time MAC RX enters low-power idle (LPI) state. Shows the total number of Rx LPI events since EEE counters were last cleared.
Rx Low Power Idle Duration
(uSec)
Tx Low Power Idle Event Count
Tx Low Power Idle Duration
(uSec)
This field indicates duration of Rx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows the total duration of Rx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.
This field is incremented each time MAC TX enters LPI state. Shows the total number of Tx LPI events since EEE counters were last cleared.
This field indicates duration of Tx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows the total duration of Tx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.
Configure System Information
64
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 15. Green Ethernet Local Device Information (continued)
Field
Tw_sys_tx (uSec)
Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec)
Tw_sys_rx (uSec)
Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec)
Fallback Tw_sys (uSec)
Tx_dll_enabled
Description
Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system can support.
Integer that indicates the remote system’s Transmit Tw_sys that was used by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it wants to request from the remote system.
Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system requests from the remote system.
Integer that indicates the remote system’s Receive Tw_sys that was used by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it can support.
Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the local system requests from the remote system.
Data Link Layer Enabled: Initialization status of the EEE transmit Data Link
Layer management function on the local system.
Tx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the tx system initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU containing
EEE TLV.
Status of the EEE capability negotiation on the local system. Rx_dll_enabled
Rx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the rx system initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU containing
EEE TLV.
Time Since Counters Last Cleared Time Since Counters Last Cleared (since the time of power-up, or after
EEE counters are cleared).
View Green Ethernet Remote Device Details
To view green Ethernet remote device information:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
Configure System Information
65
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Green Ethernet >
Green Ethernet Details
.
The Green Ethernet Details page displays.
6.
Scroll down to the Remote Device Information section.
7.
Select the interface.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 16. Green Ethernet Remote Device Information
Field
Remote ID
Description
The remote client identifier assigned to the remote system.
Remote Tw_sys_tx (uSec)
Remote Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Transmit Tw_sys echoed back by the remote system.
Remote Tw_sys_rx (uSec)
Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system can support.
Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system requests from the local system.
Remote Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Receive Tw_sys echoed back by the remote system.
Remote Fallback Tw_sys (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the remote system is advertising.
View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary
This page summarizes the green Ethernet settings currently in use.
To view the green Ethernet statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
66
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Summary
.
The Green Ethernet Statistics Summary page displays.
6.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 17. Green Ethernet Statistics Summary information
Field Description
Current Power Consumption (mW) Estimated power consumption by all ports of the switch in mWatts.
Percentage Power Saving (%) Estimated percentage of power saved on all ports of the switch if the green modes are enabled.
Cumulative Energy Saving (W * H) Estimated cumulative energy saved on the switch in watts multiplied by hours if all green modes are enabled.
Unit The unit ID.
Green Features supported on this unit
List of green features supported on the given unit, which could be one or more of the following: Energy-Detect (Energy Detect), Short-Reach (Short
Reach), EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet), LPI-History (EEE Low Power Idle
History), LLDP-Cap-Exchg (EEE LLDP Capability Exchange), Pwr-Usg-Est
(Power Usage Estimates).
Interface
Energy Detect Admin mode
Interface for which data is displayed or configured.
Enable or disable Energy Detect mode on the port. When this mode is enabled, when the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down for a short period of time, then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows the switch to perform autonegotiation and save power consumption when no link partner is present.
Energy Detect Operational Status Current operational status of the Energy Detect mode.
EEE Admin mode Enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet mode on the port. With EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during link idle conditions.
Configure the Green Ethernet EEE LPI History
You can configure and view the Green Ethernet low power idle (LPI) history.
To configure the port Green Ethernet EEE LPI history:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Configure System Information
67
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet LPI History
.
The Green Ethernet LPI History page displays.
6.
Select the interface.
7.
In the
Sampling Interval
field, enter the interval at which EEE LPI data is collected.
This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 30 to 36000.The default value is 3600.
8.
In the
Max Samples to keep
field, enter the maximum number of samples to keep.
This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 1 to 168.The default value is 168.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The Percentage LPI time field shows the time spent in LPI mode the since EEE counters were last cleared.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 18. Interface Green Mode EEE LPI History information
Field
Sample No.
Time Since The Sample Was
Recorded
Percentage Time spent in LPI mode since last sample
Percentage Time spent in LPI mode since last reset
Description
Sample index.
Each time the page is refreshed, it shows a different time as it reflects the difference between current time and time at which the sample was recorded.
Percentage of time spent in LPI mode during the current measurement interval.
Percentage of time spent in LPI mode since EEE LPI statistics were reset.
Configure System Information
68
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Manage the Bonjour Settings and View Bonjour
Information
A Mac OS device that supports Bonjour can discover the switch in the network so that you can find the switch IP address and log in to the local browser interface of the switch. Bonjour is enabled by default on the switch. You can disable Bonjour for security reasons.
Manage the Bonjour Settings
To manage the Bonjour settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Bonjour > Bonjour Configuration
.
The Bonjour Global Configuration page displays.
6.
Select one of the following radio buttons:
• Disable
. Bonjour is disabled.
• Enable
. Bonjour is enabled. This is the default setting.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
View Bonjour Information
To view Bonjour information:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
Configure System Information
69
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Bonjour > Bonjour Details
.
The Bonjour Information page displays. The page also shows the Published Services section.
The Bonjour Information section shows whether Bonjour is enabled on the switch.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 19. Published Services information
Field Description
Service Name The Bonjour service names in the switch.
Type
Domain
The Bonjour service type names in the switch.
The Bonjour service domain in the switch.
Port
TXT data
The Bonjour service port number.
The Bonjour service text.
Control the LEDs
You can turn the system LEDs and port LEDs on the switch on and off. By default, a port LED lights when you connect a powered-on device to the port. When the switch functions with its
LEDs off, we refer to it as Quiet mode.
To control the LEDs:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
Configure System Information
70
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > LED Control
.
6.
Select the System LEDs
On
or
Off
radio button.
By default, the
On
radio button is selected and the system LEDs are enabled. When you select the
Off
radio button, the Cloud LED is disabled, and for all models except for
GC110, the Max PoE LED is disabled.
7.
Select the Port LEDs
On
or
Off
radio button.
By default, the
On
radio button is selected and the port LEDs are enabled. When you select the
Off
radio button, the port LEDs are disabled.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Use the Device View
For information about the device view, see
Local Browser Interface Device View
Configure Power over Ethernet
For information about Power over Ethernet (PoE), see
Configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol
The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. This information is viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on the LAN.
The following sections describe how you can configure LLDP:
•
Configure LLDP Global Settings
•
•
View the LLDP-MED Network Policy
•
Configure the LLDP-MED Port Settings
•
LLDP-MED Neighbors Information
Configure System Information
71
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
•
View LLDP Neighbors Information
LLDP is a one-way protocol without any request/response sequences. Information is advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be enabled or disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an enhancement to LLDP with the following features:
•
Autodiscovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 priority, and DiffServ settings), enabling plug and play networking.
•
Device location discovery for creation of location databases.
•
Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.
•
Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions, serial/asset number).
Configure LLDP Global Settings
You can specify the global LLDP and LLDP-MED parameters that are applied to the switch.
To configure global LLDP settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > LLDP > Basic > LLDP Configuration
.
The LLDP Properties pager displays.
6.
To configure nondefault values for the following LLDP properties, specify the following options:
Configure System Information
72
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• TLV Advertised Interval
. The number of seconds between transmissions of LLDP advertisements.
• Hold Multiplier
. The transmit interval multiplier value, in which the transmit hold multiplier multiplied by the transmit interval is the time to live (TTL) value that the switch advertises to its neighbors.
• Reinitializing Delay
. The number of seconds that the switch waits before attempting to reinitialize LLDP on a port after the LLDP operating mode on the port changes.
• Transmit Delay
. The number of seconds that the switch waits between transmissions of remote data change notifications to one or more SNMP trap receivers configured on the switch.
7.
To configure a nondefault value for LLDP-MED, enter a value in the
Fast Start Duration
field.
This value sets the number of LLDP packets sent when the LLDP-MED fast start mechanism is initialized, which occurs when a new endpoint device links with the
LLDP-MED network connectivity device.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure LLDP Port Settings
You can specify per-interface LLDP settings.
To configure the LLDP interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP Port Settings
.
The LLDP Port Settings page displays.
Configure System Information
73
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
7.
Use the following menus to configure the LLDP settings for the selected ports:
• Admin Status
. Select the status for transmitting and receiving LLDP packets:
Tx Only
. Enable only transmitting LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.
Rx Only
. Enable only receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.
Tx and Rx
. Enable both transmitting and receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.
Disabled
. Do not transmit or receive LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.
The default is Tx and Rx.
• Management IP Address
. Choose whether to advertise the management IP address from the interface. The possible field values are as follows:
Stop Advertise
. Do not advertise the management IP address from the interface.
Auto Advertise
. Advertise the current IP address of the device as the management IP address.
The default is Auto Advertise.
• Notification
. When notifications are enabled, LLDP interacts with the trap manager to notify subscribers of remote data change statistics. The default is Disable.
• Optional TLV(s)
. Enable or disable the transmission of optional type-length value
(TLV) information from the interface. The default is Enable. The TLV information includes the system name, system description, system capabilities, and port description.
For information about how to configure the system name, see
on page 29. For information about how to configure the
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
View the LLDP-MED Network Policy
This page displays information about the LLPD-MED network policy TLV transmitted in the
LLDP frames on the selected local interface.
To view LLDP-MED network policy information for an interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
Configure System Information
74
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Network Policy
.
The LLDP-MED Network Policy page displays.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface for which you want to view the information.
Note:
The menu includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled. If no interfaces are enabled for LLDP, the
Interface
menu does not display.
The page refreshes and displays the data transmitted in the network policy TLVs for the interface.
The following table describes the LLDP-MED network policy information that displays on the page.
Table 20. LLDP-MED network policy information
Field
Network Policy Number
Application
VLAN ID
VLAN Type
Description
The policy number.
The media application type associated with the policy, which can be one of the following:
•
Unknown
•
Voice
•
Guest Voice
•
Guest Voice Signaling
•
Softphone Voice
•
Video Conferencing
•
Streaming Video
•
Video Signaling
A port can receive multiple application types. The application information is displayed only if a network policy TLV was transmitted from the port.
The VLAN ID associated with the policy.
Indicates whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.
Configure System Information
75
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 20. LLDP-MED network policy information (continued)
Field
User Priority
DSCP
Description
The priority associated with the policy.
The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.
Configure the LLDP-MED Port Settings
You can enable LLDP-MED mode on an interface and configure its properties.
To configure LLDP-MED settings for a port:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Port Settings
.
The LLDP-MED Port Settings page displays.
6.
From the
Port
menu, select the port to configure.
7.
Use the following menus to enable or disable the following LLDP-MED settings for the selected port:
• LLDP-MED Status
. The administrative status of LLDP-MED on the interface. When
LLDP-MED is enabled, the transmit and receive function of LLDP is effectively enabled on the interface.
• Notification
. When notifications are enabled, the port sends a topology change notification if a device is connected or removed.
• MED Capabilities
. When MED capabilities are enabled, the port transmits the capabilities type length values (TLVs) in the LLDP PDU frames.
• Network Policy.
When the network policy is enabled, the port transmits the network policy TLV in LLDP frames.
• Extended MDI-PSE
. When the extended MDI-PSE is enabled, the port transmits the extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames.
Configure System Information
76
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
LLDP-MED Neighbors Information
You can display the LLDP-MED neighbor or remote device information for an interface.
To view LLDP-MED Neighbor Information:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Neighbors Information
.
The page that displays shows multiple sections with information about LLDP-MED neighbors.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select an interface.
The menu includes only the interfaces for which LLDP is enabled.
7.
To refresh the page, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the non-configurable LLDP-MED Neighbors Information that displays for the selected interface.
Field Description
LLDP-MED Interface Selection
Specifies the remote client identifier assigned to the remote system.
Remote ID
Capability Information
This section of the page specifies the supported and enabled capabilities that are received in MED TLV on this port.
Supported Capabilities
Enabled Capabilities
Specifies supported capabilities that are received in MED TLV on this port.
Specifies enabled capabilities that are received in MED TLV on this port.
Configure System Information
77
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Field
Device Class
Description
Specifies device class as advertised by the device remotely connected to the port.
Network Policies Information
This section of the page specifies if network policy TLV is received in the LLDP frames on this port.
Media Application Type Specifies the application type: unknown, voicesignaling, guestvoice, guestvoicesignalling, softphonevoice, videoconferencing, streamingvideo, or videosignaling.
Information for each application type includes the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP, tagged bit status and unknown bit status. A port can receive information about one or many of such application types. The application type is displayed only if a network policy TLV is received on a port.
VLAN ID
Priority
DSCP
Unknown Bit Status
Specifies the VLAN ID associated with a particular policy type.
Specifies the priority associated with a particular policy type.
Specifies the DSCP associated with a particular policy type.
Specifies the unknown bit associated with a particular policy type.
Specifies the tagged bit associated with a particular policy type.
Tagged Bit Status
Inventory Information
This section of the page specifies if inventory TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.
Hardware Revision Specifies the hardware version of the remote device.
Firmware Revision
Software Revision
Serial Number
Manufacturer Name
Specifies the firmware version of the remote device.
Specifies software version of the remote device.
Specifies the serial number of the remote device.
Specifies the manufacturer’s name of the remote device.
Model Name
Asset Id
Specifies the model name of the remote device.
Specifies the asset ID of the remote device.
Location Information
This section of the page specifies if location TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.
Sub Type
Location Information
Specifies the type of location information.
Specifies the location information as a string for a given type of location ID.
Extended PoE
This section of the page specifies if the remote device is a PoE device.
Specifies the remote device’s PoE device type connected to this port.
Device Type
Extended PoE PSE
Configure System Information
78
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Field Description
This section of the page specifies if extended PSE TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port.
Device Type Specifies the remote device’s PoE device type connected to this port.
Power Source
Power Priority
Power Value
Extended PoE PD
Specifies the remote port’s PSE power source.
Specifies the remote port’s PSE power priority.
Specifies the remote port’s PSE power value in tenths of watts.
This section of the page specifies if extended PD TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port.
Device Type Specifies the remote device’s PoE device type connected to this port.
Power Source
Power Priority
Power Value
Specifies the remote port’s PD power source.
Specifies the remote port's PD power priority.
Specifies the remote port's PD power requirement.
View Local LLDP Information
You can view the data that each port advertises through LLDP.
To view local LLDP information:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Advanced > LLDP > Local Information
.
The page that displays shows the Device Information section and the Port Information section.
The page includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled.
Configure System Information
79
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the LLDP device information and port summary information.
Field
Device Information
Chassis ID Subtype
Chassis ID
System Name
System Description
Description
The type of information used to identify the switch in the Chassis ID field.
The hardware platform identifier for the switch.
The user-configured system name for the switch.
The switch description, which includes information about the product model and platform.
The primary functions that the switch supports.
System Capabilities
Interface Information
Interface
Port ID Subtype
Port ID
Port Description
The interface associated with the LLDP data.
The type of information used to identify the interface in the Port ID field.
The port number.
The user-defined description of the port. For information about how to configure the port description, see
The TLV advertisement status of the port. Advertisement
6.
To view additional details about a port, click the name of the port in the Interface column of the Port Information table.
The following table describes the detailed local information that displays for the selected port.
Field
Managed Address
Address SubType
Description
Address
Interface SubType
Interface Number
MAC/PHY Details
The type of address the management interface uses, such as an IPv4 address.
The address used to manage the device.
The port subtype.
The number that identifies the port.
Auto Negotiation Supported Indicates whether the interface supports port speed autonegotiation. The possible values are True and False.
Auto Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The possible values are True
(enabled) or False (disabled).
Auto Negotiation Advertised
Capabilities
The port speed autonegotiation capabilities such as 1000BASE-T half-duplex mode or 100BASE-TX full-duplex mode.
Configure System Information
80
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Field
Operational MAU Type
Description
The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface collision detection and bit injection into the network.
MED Details
Capabilities Supported
Current Capabilities
Device Class
The MED capabilities enabled on the port.
The TLVs advertised by the port.
Network Connectivity indicates that the device is a network connectivity device.
Network Policies
Application Type
VLAN ID
VLAN Type
User Priority
DSCP
The media application type associated with the policy.
The VLAN ID associated with the policy.
Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.
The priority associated with the policy.
The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.
View LLDP Neighbors Information
You can view the data that a specified interface received from other LLDP-enabled systems.
To view LLDP information received from a neighbor device:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Advanced > LLDP > Neighbor Information
.
The Neighbor Information page displays.
Configure System Information
81
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If no information was received from a neighbor device, or if the link partner is not
LLDP-enabled, no information displays.
The following table describes the information that displays for all LLDP neighbors that were discovered.
Field
MSAP Entry
Local Port
Chassis ID Subtype
Chassis ID
Port ID Subtype
Port ID
System Name
Description
The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote device.
The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a remote system.
The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.
The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.
The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.
The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data was sent.
The system name associated with the remote device. If the field is blank, the name might not be configured on the remote system.
6.
To view additional information about the remote device, click the link in the MSAP Entry column.
A pop-up window displays information for the selected port.
The following table describes the information transmitted by the neighbor.
Field
Port Details
Local Port
Description
The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a remote system.
The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote device.
MSAP Entry
Basic Details
Chassis ID Subtype
Chassis ID
Port ID Subtype
Port ID
Port Description
System Name
System Description
The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.
The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.
The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.
The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data was sent.
The user-defined description of the port.
The system name associated with the remote device.
The description of the selected port associated with the remote system.
Configure System Information
82
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Field
System Capabilities
Managed Addresses
Address SubType
Address
Interface SubType
Interface Number
Description
The system capabilities of the remote system.
The type of the management address.
The advertised management address of the remote system.
The port subtype.
The port on the remote device that sent the information.
MAC/PHY Details
Auto-Negotiation Supported Specifies whether the remote device supports port-speed autonegotiation.
The possible values are True or False.
Auto-Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The possible values are True and False.
Auto Negotiation Advertised
Capabilities
The port speed autonegotiation capabilities.
Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface collision detection and bit injection into the network.
MED Details
Capabilities Supported
Current Capabilities
Device Class
PoE Device Type
PoE Power Source
PoE Power Priority
PoE Power Value
Hardware Revision
Firmware Revision
Software Revision
Serial Number
The supported capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.
The advertised capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.
The LLDP-MED endpoint device class. The possible device classes are as follows:
•
Endpoint Class 1 Indicates a generic endpoint class, offering basic LLDP services.
•
Endpoint Class 2 Indicates a media endpoint class, offering media streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features.
•
Endpoint Class 3 Indicates a communications device class, offering all
Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location, 911, Layer 2 switch support, and device information management capabilities.
The PoE device type advertised by the remote device.
The PoE power type advertised by the remote device.
The PoE power priority advertised by the remote device.
The PoE power value advertised by the remote device.
The hardware version advertised by the remote device.
The firmware version advertised by the remote device.
The software version advertised by the remote device.
The serial number advertised by the remote device.
Configure System Information
83
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Field
Model Name
Asset ID
Location Information
Civic
Description
The model name advertised by the remote device.
The asset ID advertised by the remote device.
Coordinates
ECS ELIN
The physical location, such as the street address, that the remote device advertised in the location TLV, for example, 123 45th St. E. The field value length range is 6–160 characters.
The location map coordinates that the remote device advertised in the location TLV, including latitude, longitude, and altitude.
The Emergency Call Service (ECS) Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN) that the remote device advertised in the location TLV. The field range is 10–25.
The unknown location information for the remote device.
Unknown
Network Policies
Application Type
VLAN ID
VLAN Type
User Priority
DSCP
LLDP Unknown TLVs
Type
Value
The media application type associated with the policy advertised by the remote device.
The VLAN ID associated with the policy.
Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.
The priority associated with the policy.
The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.
The unknown TLV type field.
The unknown TLV value field.
Configure DHCP L2 Relay and DHCP Snooping
The switch supports DHCP L2 Relay, DHCP snooping, and Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI).
DHCP snooping and DAI are Layer 2 security features that examine traffic to help prevent accidental and malicious attacks on the switch or network.
The following sections describe how to configure DHCP L2 Relay, DHCP snooping, and
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI):
•
•
Configure System Information
84
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure a DHCP L2 Relay
DHCP relay agents eliminate the need to connect to a DHCP server on each physical network. Relay agents populate the giaddr field and also append the Relay Agent Information option to the DHCP messages. DHCP servers use this option for IP addresses and other parameter assignment policies. These DHCP relay agents are typically IP routing-aware devices and are referred to as Layer 3 relay agents. In some network configurations, a need might exist for Layer 2 devices to append the Relay Agent Information option as they are closer to the end hosts.
These Layer 2 devices typically operate only as bridges for the network and might not include an IPv4 address on the network. Lacking a valid IPv4 source address, they cannot relay packets directly to a DHCP server located on another network. These Layer 2 devices append the Relay Agent Information option and broadcast the DHCP message.
Enable the Global DHCP L2 Relay Settings
You can enable the global DHCP L2 relay settings for the switch.
To enable DHCP L2 relay global settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration
.
The DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the Admin Mode
Enable
radio button.
The default admin mode is disabled.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the DHCP L2 Relay Settings for a VLAN
You can configure the DHCP L2 relay settings for a VLAN.
Configure System Information
85
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To configure the DHCP L2 relay settings for a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration
.
The DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration page displays.
6.
Select one or more VLANs, or select all VLANs by selecting the check box in the table heading.
7.
From the
Admin Mode
menu, select to enable or disable the DHCP L2 relay on the selected VLAN or VLANs.
The default is Disable.
8.
From the
Circuit ID Mode
menu, select to enable the interface number to be added as the circuit ID in DHCP option 82 or to disable the interface number from being added as the circuit ID in DHCP option 82.
The default is Disable.
9.
In the
Remote ID String
field, enter a remote ID description of up to 32 characters.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Settings
You can configure the DHCP L2 relay interface settings.
To configure the DHCP L2 relay interface settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Configure System Information
86
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration
.
The DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Admin Mode
menu, select to enable or disable the DHCP L2 relay on the selected interface.
The default is Disable.
9.
From the
82 Option Trust Mode
menu, select to enable or disable an interface to be trusted for DHCP L2 Relay (Option-82) received.
The default is Disable.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
View or Clear the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics
You can view information about the DHCP L2 relay interfaces.
To view or clear the DHCP L2 relay interface statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Configure System Information
87
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics
.
The DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.
Field
Interface
Untrusted Server
Messages With Opt82
Untrusted Client
Messages With Opt82
Description
The interface from which the DHCP message is received.
The number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted server.
The number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted client.
Trusted Server Messages
Without Opt82
The number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted server.
Trusted Client Messages
Without Opt82
The number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted client.
8.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
9.
To clear all interfaces statistics, click the
Clear
button.
Configure DHCP Snooping
DHCP snooping is a useful feature that provides security by filtering untrusted DHCP messages and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table. An untrusted message is a message that is received from outside the network or firewall and that can cause traffic attacks within your network. The DHCP snooping binding table contains the
MAC address, IP address, lease time, binding type, VLAN number, and interface information that corresponds to the local untrusted interfaces of a switch. An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall. A
Configure System Information
88
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network.
DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. It also provides way to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and trusted interfaces connected to the DHCP server or another switch.
Enable the Global DHCP Snooping Settings
You can view and configure the global settings for DHCP snooping.
To enable the global DHCP snooping settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration
.
The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the DHCP Snooping Mode
Enable
radio button.
7.
To enable the verification of the sender’s MAC address for DHCP snooping, select the MAC
Address Validation
Enable
radio button.
When MAC address validation is enabled, the device checks packets that are received on an untrusted interface to verify that the MAC address and the DHCP client hardware address match. If the addresses do not match, the device drops the packet.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Enable DHCP for All Interfaces in a VLAN
To enable DHCP snooping for all interfaces that are members of a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
Configure System Information
89
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration
.
The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
VLAN ID
field, enter the VLAN on which DHCP snooping must be enabled.
7.
From the
DHCP Snooping Mode
menu, select
Enable
.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure DHCP Snooping Interface Settings
You can view and configure each port as a trusted or untrusted port. Any DHCP responses received on a trusted port are forwarded. If a port is configured as untrusted, any DHCP (or
BootP) responses received on that port are discarded.
To configure DHCP snooping interface settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
90
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP Snooping > Interface Configuration
.
The DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Trust Mode
menu, select the desired trust mode:
• Disabled
. The interface is considered to be untrusted and could potentially be used to launch a network attack. DHCP server messages are checked against the bindings database. On untrusted ports, DHCP snooping enforces the following security rules:
-
DHCP packets from a DHCP server (DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,
DHCPRELEASEQUERY) are dropped.
-
DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE messages are dropped if the MAC address is in the snooping database but the binding’s interface is other than the interface where the message was received.
-
DHCP packets are dropped when the source MAC address does not match the client hardware address if MAC address validation is globally enabled.
• Enabled
. The interface is considered to be trusted and forwards DHCP server messages without validation.
9.
From the
Invalid Packets
menu, select the packet logging mode.
When enabled, the DHCP snooping feature generates a log message when an invalid packet is received and dropped by the interface.
10.
In the
Rate Limit(pps)
field, specify the rate limit value for DHCP snooping purposes.
If the incoming rate of DHCP packets per second exceeds the configured burst interval per second, the port shuts down. If the rate limit value is N/A, then the burst interval is also nonapplicable, and rate limiting is disabled.
11.
In the
Burst Interval(secs)
field, specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purposes on this interface.
If the rate limit is N/A, then the burst interval is also nonapplicable, and the field displays
N/A.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Static DHCP Bindings
You can view, add, and remove static bindings in the DHCP snooping bindings database and to view or clear the dynamic bindings in the bindings table.
Configure System Information
91
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To configure static DHCP bindings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP Snooping > Binding Configuration
.
The Static Binding Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface on which the DHCP client is authorized.
7.
In the
MAC Address
field, specify the MAC address for the binding to be added.
This is the key to the binding database.
8.
From the
VLAN ID
menu, select the ID of the VLAN the client is authorized to use.
9.
In the
IP Address
field, specify the IP address of the client.
10.
Click the
Add
button.
The DHCP snooping binding entry is added to the database.
The Dynamic Binding Configuration table shows information about the DHCP bindings that were dynamically (that is, automatically) learned on each interface on which DHCP snooping is enabled. The following table describes the dynamic bindings information.
Table 21. DHCP Dynamic Configuration information
Field
Interface
MAC Address
VLAN ID
IP Address
Lease Time
Description
The interface on which the DHCP client message was received.
The MAC address associated with the DHCP client that sent the message. This is the key to the binding database.
The VLAN ID of the client interface.
The IP address assigned to the client by the DHCP server.
The remaining IP address lease time for the client.
Configure System Information
92
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure the Persistent Location of the DHCP Snooping Bindings Database
You can configure the persistent location of the DHCP snooping bindings database. The bindings database can be stored locally on the device or on a remote system somewhere else in the network. The device must be able to reach the IP address of the remote system to send bindings to a remote database.
To configure the persistent location of the DHCP snooping bindings database:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP Snooping > Persistent Configuration
.
The DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration page displays.
6.
Specify where the DHCP snooping bindings database is located:
• Local
. The binding table is stored locally on the switch.
• Remote
. The binding table is stored on a remote TFTP server.
If the database is stored on a remote server, specify the following information:
a.
In the
Remote IP Address
field, enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
b.
In the
Remote File Name
field, enter the file name of the DHCP snooping bindings database in which the bindings are stored.
7.
In the
Write Delay
field, specify the time to wait between writing bindings information to persistent storage.
The delay allows the device to collect as many entries as possible (new and removed) before writing them to the persistent file.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
93
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View or Clear the DHCP Snooping Statistics
You can view and clear per-interface statistics about the DHCP messages filtered by the
DHCP snooping feature on untrusted interfaces.
To view or clear the DHCP snooping statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Services > DHCP Snooping > Statistics
.
The DHCP Snooping Statistics page displays.
6.
To refresh the information on the page, click the
Refresh
button.
7.
To clear all interfaces statistics, click the
Clear
button.
The following table describes the DHCP snooping statistics.
Table 22. DHCP Snooping Statistics information
Field
Interface
Description
The interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.
MAC Verify Failures The number of DHCP messages that were dropped because the source MAC address and client hardware address did not match. MAC address verification is performed only if it is globally enabled.
Client Ifc Mismatch The number of packets that were dropped by DHCP snooping because the interface and
VLAN on which the packet was received do not match the client’s interface and VLAN information stored in the binding database.
DHCP Server Msgs
Received
The number of DHCP server messages ((DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,
DHCPRELEASEQUERY) that were dropped on an untrusted port.
Set Up PoE Timer Schedules
For information about PoE timer schedules, see
Chapter 8, Manage Power over Ethernet
Configure System Information
94
3.
Configure Switching
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
•
Configure Link Aggregation Groups
•
•
•
•
Configure Spanning Tree Protocol
•
•
View, Search, and Configure the MAC Address Table
•
Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection
3
95
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure Port Settings
You can view, configure, and monitor the physical port information for the ports (that is, the physical interfaces) on the switch.
To configure port settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Ports > Port Configuration
.
The Port Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces (ports, LAGs, or both) by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
In the
Description
field, enter the description string to be attached to a port.
The string can be up to 64 characters in length.
9.
From the
Admin Mode
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
This sets the port control administrative mode. You must select
Enable
in order for the port to participate in the network. The default is Enable.
10.
From the
Auto-negotiation
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
This specifies the autonegotiation mode for this port. The default is Enable.
Configure Switching
96
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Note:
After you change the autonegotiation mode, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.
11.
In the
Speed
field, specify the speed value for the selected port.
-
Auto. All supported speeds. If you select
Auto
, the duplex mode and speed are set by the autonegotiation process. The port’s maximum capability (full duplex and 1000 Mbps) are advertised. Otherwise, your selection determines the port’s duplex mode and transmission rate. The default setting is Auto.
10
. 10 Mbits/sec.
100
. 100 Mbits/sec.
1000
. 1000 Mbits/sec. This selection is available only if autonegotiation is enabled.
The delimiter characters for setting different speed values are a comma (,), a period
(.) and a space ( ). For you to set the auto-negotiation speed, the autonegotiation mode must be set to
Enable
. The default is Auto.
Note:
After you change the speed settings, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.
12.
From the
Duplex Mode
menu, select the duplex mode for the selected port.
Possible values are as follows:
• Auto
. Indicates that speed is set by the auto-negotiation process.
• Full
. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in both directions simultaneously.
• Half
. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in only one direction at a time.
The default is Auto.
Note:
After you change the duplex mode, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.
13.
Use the
Link Trap
menu to specify whether or not to send a trap when link status changes.
The
Link Trap
menu is enabled by default. However, for LAG interfaces, the menu is disabled.
14.
In the
Frame Size
field, specify the maximum Ethernet frame size the interface supports or is configured to use, including Ethernet header, CRC, and payload.
The range is 1500 to 9198. The default maximum frame size is 1500.
15.
From the
Flow Control
menu, select the configuration for IEEE 802.3 flow control.
• Disable
. If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames, and data loss could occur. This is the default setting.
• Symmetric
. If the port buffers become full, the switch sends pause frames to stop traffic.
Configure Switching
97
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the number of frames being switched. When you enable flow control, the switch can send a pause frame to stop traffic on the port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the port exceeds a preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner devices. The paused port does not forward packets for the time that is specified in the pause frame. When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a specified low threshold, the switch enables the port to again transmit frames. The switch also honors incoming pause frames by temporarily halting transmission.
• Asymmetric
. If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames, and data loss could occur. However, the switch does honor incoming pause frames by temporarily halting transmission.
Note:
For LAG interfaces, flow control mode is displayed as a blank field because flow control is not applicable.
16.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.
Table 23. Port Configuration information
Field
Port Type
Physical Status
Link Status
MAC Address
PortList Bit Offset ifIndex
Description
For normal ports this field is blank. Otherwise, the possible values are as follows:
• Mirrored
. The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is copied to the probe port.
• Probe
. Use this port to monitor a mirrored port.
• Trunk Member
. The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk.
Look at the LAG pages for more information.
The port speed and duplex mode.
Indicates whether the link is up or down.
The physical address of the specified interface.
The bit offset value that corresponds to the port when the MIB object type PortList is used to manage in SNMP.
The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.
Configure Link Aggregation Groups
Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port channels, allow you to combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. The LAG by default becomes a member of the default management VLAN (that is, VLAN 1).
Configure Switching
98
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must participate in the same protocols. A static port channel interface does not require a partner system to be able to aggregate its member ports.
The switch supports static LAGs. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, the port neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs.
Configure LAG Settings
You can group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group, which is also known as a port channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it were a single link.
To configure LAG settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> LAG > Basic > LAG Configuration
.
The LAG Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
LAG Name
field, enter a name for the LAG.
You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be specified for you to create the LAG.
7.
In the
Description
field, enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.
The description can be up to 64 characters in length.
8.
From the
Admin Mode
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that form the LAG are not released. The default is Enable.
9.
From the
Hash Mode
menu, select the load-balancing mode for a port channel (LAG):
• 1 Src MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port
. This mode uses the source MAC address, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port that are associated with the packet.
Configure Switching
99
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• 2 Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port
. This mode uses the destination MAC address, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port that are associated with the packet.
• 3 Src/Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port
. This mode uses the source and destination MAC addresses, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port that are associated with the packet. This is the default mode.
• 4 Src IP and Src TCP/UDP Port fields
. This mode uses the source IP address and source TCP or UDP port value that are associated with the packet.
• 5 Dest IP and Dest TCP/UDP Port fields
. This mode uses the destination IP address and destination TCP or UDP port value that are associated with the packet.
• 6 Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port fields
. This mode uses the source and destination
IP addresses and source and destination TCP or UDP port values that are associated with the packet.
Note:
The switch balances traffic on a port channel (LAG) by selecting one of the links in the channel over which packets must be transmitted. The switch selects the link by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link.
10.
From the
STP Mode
menu, select the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) administrative mode associated with the LAG. The possible values are as follows:
• Disable
. Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.
• Enable
. Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.
11.
From the
Link Trap
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
to specify whether to send a trap when the link status changes.
The default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.
12.
From the
LAG Type
menu, select
Static
or
LACP
:
• Static
. Disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the selected LAG. The
LAG is configured manually. The default is Static.
• LACP
. Disables LACP on the selected LA. The LAG is configured automatically.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 24. LAG Configuration information
Field
LAG ID
Active Ports
LAG State
Description
Identifier of the LAG.
The ports that are actively participating in the LAG.
Indicates whether the link is up or down.
Configure Switching
100
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure LAG Membership
You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port channel. The switch can treat the port channel as a single link.
To configure LAG membership:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> LAG > Basic > LAG Membership
.
The LAG Membership page displays.
6.
From the
LAG ID
menu, select the LAG ID.
7.
In the
LAG Name
field, enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.
You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be specified for you to create the LAG.
8.
In the Ports table, click each port that you want to include as a member of the selected
LAG.
A selected port is displayed by a check mark.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
10.
To view the members of the LAG, click the
Current members
button.
A pop-up window opens and displays the list of current members.
Configure Switching
101
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Set the LACP System Priority
The LACP configuration page is used to set the LACP system priority.
To configure LACP:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> LAG > Advanced > LACP Configuration
.
The LACP Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
LACP System Priority
field, specify the device’s link aggregation priority relative to the devices at the other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled.
A higher value indicates a lower priority. You can change the value of the parameter globally by specifying a priority from 1 to 65535. The default value is 32768.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Set the LACP Port Priority Settings
The LACP port configuration page is used to configure the LACP priority value for the selected port and the administrative LACP time-out value.
To configure LACP port priority settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
Configure Switching
102
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> LAG > Advanced > LACP Port Configuration
.
The LACP Port Priority page displays.
6.
Select one or more interfaces (ports only, no LAGs) by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or type the interface number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
7.
In the
LACP Priority
field, specify the LACP priority value for the selected interfaces.
This value specifies the device’s link aggregation priority relative to the devices at the other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled. A higher value indicates a lower priority. The range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 128.
8.
In the
Timeout
field, configure the administrative LACP time-out value:
• Long
. Specifies a long time-out value. This is the default setting.
• Short
. Specifies a short time-out value.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure VLANs
Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2 header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.
By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be grouped by logical function instead of physical location.
Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE
802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the
Configure Switching
103
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
packet can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A given port can handle traffic for more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.
You can define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table. The switch supports up to 256 VLANs. VLAN 1 is created by default and is the default VLAN of which all ports are members. VLAN 4089 is also created by default and is the Auto-Video VLAN. By default, the
Auto-Video VLAN does not include any members.
Manage Basic VLANs
You can add, change, and delete VLANs. For information about adding members to a VLAN, see
Add a VLAN
To add a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration
.
The VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
VLAN ID
field, specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.
The range of the VLAN ID can be from 1 to 4093.
7.
In the
VLAN Name
field, specify a name for the VLAN.
The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.
8.
The
VLAN Type
field displays the type of the VLAN that you are configuring.
You cannot change the type of the default VLAN (VLAN ID = 1): it is always type Default.
When you create a VLAN using this page, its type is always Static.
9.
Click the
Add
button.
Configure Switching
104
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The VLAN is added to the switch.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete a VLAN
To delete a VLAN from the switch:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration
.
The VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
VLAN ID
field, specify the VLAN identifier.
The range of the VLAN ID can be from 1 to 4093.
Note:
You cannot delete VLANs 1 and VLAN 4089, which are created by default.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The VLAN is removed.
Reset a VLAN to Its Default Settings
To reset a VLAN to its default settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
Configure Switching
105
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration
.
You can also select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration
.
The VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the
Reset Configuration
check box.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The default values are as follows:
•
All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.
•
All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.
•
All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.
•
All ports are configured with ingress filtering disabled.
•
All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.
All VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted.
Configure VLAN Trunking
You can configure switchport mode settings on interfaces. The switchport mode defines the purpose of the port based on the type of device it connects to and constraints the VLAN configuration of the port accordingly. Assigning the correct switchport mode simplifies VLAN configuration and minimizes errors.
To configure VLAN trunking:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
Configure Switching
106
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Trunking Configuration
.
The Switchport Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Switchport Mode
menu, select one of the following modes.
• Access
. Access mode is suitable for ports connected to end stations or end users.
Access ports participate in only one VLAN. They accept both tagged and untagged packets, but always transmit untagged packets.
• General
. General mode enables a custom configuration of a port. You can configure the general port VLAN attributes such as the membership, PVID, tagging, ingress filter, and so on. For more information, see
default, all ports are initially configured in General mode.
• Trunk
. Trunk mode is intended for ports that are connected to other switches. Trunk ports can participate in multiple VLANs, and accept both tagged and untagged packets.
9.
From the
Access VLAN ID
menu, select the VLAN ID for the port, which is valid only when the selection from the
Switchport Mode
menu
Access
.
By default, the access VLAN ID is 1.
10.
From the
Native VLAN ID
menu, select the VLAN ID for the port, which is valid only when the selection from the
Switchport Mode
menu
Trunk
.
By default, the native VLAN ID is 1.
11.
In the
Trunk Allowed VLANs
field, enter the set of VLANs of which the port can be a member if configured in Trunk mode.
By default, all possible VLANs in range from 1 to 4093 are listed, even if you did not yet create any VLANs.
Configure Switching
107
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Note the following:
•
Use a dash (–) to specify a range.
•
Use a comma (,) to separate VLANs in a list. Spaces are not permitted.
•
A zero value means that you want to clear the allowed VLANs.
•
The All value means that you want to set all VLANs to the range (1 to 4093).
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table shows the nonconfigurable information on the page.
Table 25. VLAN Trunking Configuration
Field
Native VLAN Tagging
Description
• Enable
. If VLAN tagging is enabled and the trunk port receives untagged frames, it forwards them to the native VLAN with no VLAN tag.
• Disable
. If VLAN Tagging is disabled, and the port receives untagged frames, it includes the native VLAN ID in the VLAN tag when forwarding. By default, VLAN Tagging is disabled.
Configure VLAN Membership
To configure VLAN membership:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership
.
The VLAN Membership page displays.
Configure Switching
108
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
In the
VLAN ID
menu, select the VLAN ID.
7.
In the
Group Operation
menu, select one of the following options, which applies to all ports in the VLAN:
• Untag All
. For all ports that are members of the VLAN, tags are removed from all egress packets.
• Tag All
. For all ports that are members of the VLAN, all egress packets are tagged.
• Remove All
. All ports are removed from the VLAN.
8.
In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following modes or reset the port to the default settings:
• T (Tagged)
. Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.
The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.
• U (Untagged)
. Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.
By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN.
9.
In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:
• T (Tagged)
. Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.
• U (Untagged)
. Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.
By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
109
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 26. Advanced VLAN membership
Field
VLAN Name
VLAN Type
Definition
The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.
The type of the VLAN you selected:
• Default
(VLAN ID = 1). Always present.
• Static
. A VLAN that you configured.
View the VLAN Status
You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.
To view the VLAN status:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Status
.
The VLAN Status page displays.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 27. VLAN status
Field
VLAN ID
VLAN Name
Definition
The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.
The name of the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 is always named Default.
VLAN 4089 is always named Auto-Video.
Configure Switching
110
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 27. VLAN status (continued)
Field
VLAN Type
Member Ports
Definition
The VLAN type:
• Default
(VLAN ID = 1). Always present.
• Static
. A VLAN that you added.
• Auto-Video
. (VLAN ID = 4089). Always present.
The ports that are included in the VLAN.
Configure Port PVID Settings
You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. The following requirements apply to a
PVID:
•
You must define a PVID for all ports.
•
If no other value is specified, the default VLAN PVID is used.
•
To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as a member (see
To configure PVID settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration
.
The PVID Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces (ports, LAGs, or both) by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
Configure Switching
111
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
In the
PVID
field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames received on this port.
The default is 1.
9.
In the
VLAN Member
field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.
VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.
10.
In the
VLAN Tag
field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.
VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. To reset the VLAN tag configuration to the defaults, use the
None
keyword. Port tagging for the VLAN can be set only if the port is a member of this VLAN.
11.
From the
Acceptable Frame
menu, specify the types of frames that can be received on this port:
• Admit All
. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. With either option,
VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.
• VLAN only
. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are discarded.
• Admit Untagged Only
. Untagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. VLAN-tagged frames are discarded.
12.
From the
Ingress Filtering
menu, select one of the following options:
• Enable
. The frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame.
• Disable
. All frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge specification. The default is Disable.
13.
In the
Port Priority
field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets arriving at the port.
You can enter a number from 0 to 7.
14.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
112
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 28. Nonconfigurable fields on the PVID Configuration page
Field
Current Ingress Filtering
Untagged VLANs
Tagged VLANs
Forbidden VLANs
Dynamic VLANs
Description
Indicates whether ingress filtering is enabled for the interface.
The number of untagged VLANs for the interface.
The number of tagged VLANs for the interface.
The number of forbidden VLANs for the interface.
Indicates None because the switch does not support dynamic VLANs.
Configure a MAC-Based VLAN
The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.
You define a MAC-to-VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC-to-VLAN table. An entry is specified through a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID. The
MAC-to-VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device (that is, a system-wide table exists with MAC address–to–VLAN ID mappings).
When untagged or priority-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the
MAC-to-VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority tagged it maintains this value. Otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the VLAN table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues.
Otherwise, the packet is dropped. This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC address mapping to a VLAN that was not created on the system.
Add a MAC-Based VLAN
To add a MAC-based VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
Configure Switching
113
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN
.
The MAC Based VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
MAC Address
field, enter a valid MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.
This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.
7.
In the
VLAN ID
field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The MAC address is added to the VLAN mapping table.
Delete a MAC Address From VLAN Mapping
To delete a MAC address from VLAN mapping:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN
.
The MAC Based VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
MAC Address
field, enter a valid MAC address.
This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN exists.
7.
In the
VLAN ID
field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.
8.
Click the
Delete
button.
The MAC address is removed from the VLAN mapping.
Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups
You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs,
Configure Switching
114
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.
If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames received on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged frames received on the port for other protocols are assigned the port VLAN ID, either the default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN
Configuration page.
You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group forms a one-to-one relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a name and a group ID is assigned automatically.
To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration
.
The Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
Group ID
field, type a number for the new group.
You can enter a number in the range from 1–128.
7.
In the
Group Name
field, type a name for the new group.
You can enter up to 16 characters.
8.
In the
Protocol
field, enter one or more protocols that must be associated with the group.
You can enter keywords such as arp, ip, and ipx. Separate keywords with a comma. You can also enter hexadecimal or decimal values in the range of 0x0600 (1536) to 0xFFFF
(65535).
9.
In the
VLAN ID
field, enter the VLAN ID.
Configure Switching
115
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The ID can be any number in the range of 1 to 4093. All the ports in the group assign this
VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols that you included in this group.
10.
Click the
Add
button.
The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 29. Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration information
Field
Ports
Description
Display all the member ports that belong to the group.
Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership
To configure protocol-based VLAN group membership:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership
.
The protocol Based VLAN Group Membership page displays.
6.
From the
Group ID
menu, select the protocol-based VLAN group ID.
The Group Name field shows the name that is associated with the group.
7.
In the Ports table and LAG table, click each port and LAG that you want to include in the protocol-based VLAN group.
A protocol-based VLAN group can include both port and LAGs. A selected port or LAG is displayed by a check mark.
8.
Click the
Apply
button
Configure Switching
116
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Your settings are saved.
9.
To view the members of the group, click the
Current members
button.
A pop-up window opens and displays the list of current members.
Configure a Voice VLAN
You can configure the parameters for a voice VLAN configuration.
To configure a voice VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Voice VLAN Configuration
.
The page that displays shows the Voice VLAN Global Admin section and Voice VLAN
Configuration section.
6.
Select the Admin Mode
Disable
or
Enable
radio button.
This enables or disables the voice VLAN for the switch. The default is Disable.
7.
Select the interface by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Interface Mode
menu, select the voice VLAN mode for selected interfaces:
• Disable
. This is the default value.
• None
. Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.
Configure Switching
117
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• VLAN ID
. Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic. With this selection, you can enter a Dot1p value in the
Value
field.
• Dot1p
. Configure voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. With this selection, you must enter a dot1p value in the
Value
field.
• Untagged
. Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.
9.
In the
Value
field, enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value.
This field is enabled only when VLAN ID or dot1p is selected as the interface mode.
10.
In the
CoS Override Mode
field, select
Disable
or
Enable
.
The default is Disable.
11.
In the
Authentication Mode
field, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
The default is Enable. When the authentication mode is enabled, voice traffic is allowed on an unauthorized voice VLAN port. When the authentication mode is disabled, devices are authorized through dot1x.
Note:
Authentication through dot1x is possible only if dot1x is enabled.
12.
In the
DSCP Value
field, configure the Voice VLAN DSCP value for the port.
The valid range is 0 to 64. The default value is 0.
The Operational State field displays the operational status of the voice VLAN on the interface.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Auto-VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) enables telephone calls over a data network. Because voice traffic is typically more time-sensitive than data traffic, the Auto-VoIP feature helps provide a classification mechanism for voice packets so that they can be prioritized above data packets in order to provide better Quality of Service (QoS). With the Auto-VoIP feature, voice prioritization is provided based on call-control protocols (SIP, SCCP, H.323) or OUI bits.
Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings
To prioritize time-sensitive voice traffic over data traffic, protocol-based Auto-VoIP checks for packets carrying the following VoIP protocols:
•
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
•
H.323
•
Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP)
Configure Switching
118
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
VoIP frames that are received on ports that for which the Auto-VoIP feature is enabled are marked with the specified CoS traffic class value.
To configure protocol-based port settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Auto-VoIP > Protocol-based > Port Settings
.
The page displays the Protocol Based Global Settings section and the Protocol Based
Port Settings section.
6.
From the
Prioritization Type
menu, select
Traffic Class
or
Remark
.
This specifies the type of prioritization.
7.
From the
Class Value
menu, specify the CoS tag value to be reassigned for packets received on the voice VLAN when Remark CoS is enabled.
8.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
9.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
10.
From the
Auto VoIP Mode
menu, select
Disable
or
Enable
.
Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.
The
Operational Status
field displays the current operational status of each interface.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
119
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties
With Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI)–based Auto-VoIP, voice prioritization is provided based on OUI bits.
To configure Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Properties
.
The OUI-based Properties page displays.
6.
In the
Auto-VoIP VLAN ID
field, enter the VoIP VLAN ID of the switch.
No default VLAN exists for Auto-VoIP, you must create a VLAN for Auto-VoIP.
7.
From the
OUI-based priority
menu, select the OUI-based priority of the switch.
The default value is 7.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
120
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure OUI-Based Port Settings
The port settings page allows you to configure the OUI port settings.
To configure OUI-based port settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Port Settings
.
The OUI Port Settings page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Auto VoIP Mode
menu, select
Disable
or
Enable
.
Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.
The
Operational Status
field displays the current operational status of each interface.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
121
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Manage the OUI Table
Device hardware manufacturers can include an OUI in a network adapter to help identify a hardware device. The OUI is a unique 24-bit number assigned by the IEEE registration authority. The switch comes preconfigured with the following OUIs that identify the IP phone manufacturer:
•
00:01:E3: SIEMENS
•
00:03:6B: CISCO1
•
00:12:43: CISCO2
•
00:0F:E2: H3C
•
00:60:B9: NITSUKO
•
00:D0:1E: PINTEL
•
00:E0:75: VERILINK
•
00:E0:BB: 3COM
•
00:04:0D: AVAYA1
•
00:1B:4F: AVAYA2
•
00:04:13: SNOM
You can select an existing OUI or add a new OUI and description to identify the IP phones on the network.
Configure the OUI Table
To configure the OUI Table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table
.
The OUI Table page displays.
Configure Switching
122
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
In the
Telephony OUI(s)
field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format
AA:BB:CC.
Up to 128 OUIs can be configured.
7.
In the
Description
field, enter the description for the OUI.
The maximum length of description is 32 characters. The following OUIs are present in the configuration by default:
•
00:01:E3 - SIEMENS
•
00:03:6B - CISCO1
•
00:12:43 - CISCO2
•
00:0F:E2 - H3C
•
00:60:B9 - NITSUKO
•
00:D0:1E - PINTEL
•
00:E0:75 - VERILINK
•
00:E0:BB - 3COM
•
00:04:0D - AVAYA1
•
00:1B:4F - AVAYA2
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The telephony OUI entry is added.
Delete One or More OUI Prefixes From the OUI Table
To delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table
.
The OUI Table page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to each OUI prefix to be removed.
Configure Switching
123
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The telephony OUI entries are removed.
Display the Auto-VoIP Status
You can display the Auto-VoIP status.
To view the Auto-VoIP status:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Auto-VoIP > Auto-VoIP Status
.
The Auto-VoIP Status page displays.
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Auto-VoIP status information.
Table 30. Auto-VoIP status
Field
Auto-VoIP VLAN ID
Description
The Auto-VoIP VLAN ID.
Maximum Number of Voice Channels Supported The maximum number of voice channels supported.
Number of Voice Channels Detected The number of VoIP channels prioritized successfully.
Configure Spanning Tree Protocol
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges.
STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. Spanning tree versions supported include Common STP, Multiple STP, and Rapid STP.
Configure Switching
124
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
Classic STP provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For
information on configuring Common STP, see
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of spanning tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the spanning tree behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight modifications in the working but not the end effect (chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to the forwarding state). The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports that are connected to end stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are represented by the parameters pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible with both
RSTP and STP. It behaves in a way that is appropriate for STP and RSTP bridges. An MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as an RSTP bridge or an STP bridge.
Note:
For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be
802.1s and their configuration names, digest keys, and revision levels must match. For additional information about regions and their effect on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Configure STP Settings
The STP Configuration page contains fields for enabling STP on the switch.
To configure STP settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration
.
The Global Settings page displays.
Configure Switching
125
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
Configure the following options:
• Spanning Tree State
. Enable or disable the spanning tree operation on the switch.
• STP Operation Mode
. Specify the STP version for the switch. The options are
STP
,
RSTP
, and
MSTP
.
For more information, see
Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
• Configuration Name
. Specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
• Configuration Revision Level
. Specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.
• Forward BPDU while STP Disabled
. Enable or disable the BPDU Flood.
The BPDU flood option specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded while spanning tree is disabled on the switch.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable STP Status fields displayed on the page.
Table 31. STP configuration status
Field
Configuration Digest Key
STP Status
Bridge Identifier
Description
Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
Time Since Topology Change
Topology Change Count
Topology Change
Designated Root
Root Path Cost
Root Port
Max Age (secs)
The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
The time in day-hour-minute-second format since the topology of the CST last changed.
The number of times that the topology changed for the CST.
The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating whether a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST.
Possible values are True and False.
The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Path cost to the designated root for the CST.
Port to access the designated root for the CST.
The maximum age timer controls the maximum length of time in seconds that passes before a bridge port saves its configuration BPDU information.
Configure Switching
126
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 31. STP configuration status (continued)
Field
Forward Delay (secs)
Hold Time (secs)
CST Regional Root
CST Path Cost
Description
The derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay parameter.
Minimum time in seconds between the transmission of configuration
BPDUs.
Priority and base MAC address of the CST regional root.
Path cost to the CST tree regional root.
Configure CST Settings
You can configure a Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on the switch.
To configure CST settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration
.
The CST Configuration page displays.
6.
Specify the CST options:
• Bridge Priority
. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge. Specify the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CST). The valid range is 0–61440. The bridge priority is a multiple of
4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the priority to any value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0.
The default value is 32768.
• Bridge Max Age (secs)
. The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a bridge must wait before
Configure Switching
127
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
implementing a topological change. The valid range is 6–40, and the value must be less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 *
(Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.
• Bridge Hello Time (secs)
. The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a root bridge must wait between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value must be less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) – 1. The default hello time value is 2.
• Bridge Forward Delay (secs)
. The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the time in seconds a bridge must remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.
The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.
• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops
. The maximum number of bridge hops the information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The valid range is 6–40. The default is 20 hops.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the MSTP Status information that is displayed.
Table 32. STP advanced CST configuration, MSTP status
Field
MST ID
VID ID
FID ID
Description
Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.
Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them.
Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.
Configure CST Port Settings
You can configure a common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree on a specific port on the switch.
A port can become diagnostically disabled if as error condition occurs such as severe BPDU flooding with more than 15 BPDUs in a 3-second interval.
To configure CST port settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
Configure Switching
128
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration
.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
STP Status
menu, select the option to enable or disable the spanning tree administrative mode associated with the port or port channel.
The possible values are
Enable
and
Disable
. The default value is Disable.
9.
From the
Fast Link
menu, select whether the specified port is an edge port within the CST.
The possible values are
Enable
and
Disable
. The default value is Disable.
10.
From the
BPDU Forwarding
menu, configure BPDU forwarding.
The possible values are
Enable
and
Disable
. The default value is Disable. When BPDU forwarding is enabled, the switch forwards the BPDU traffic arriving on this port when
STP is disabled on this port.
11.
From the
Auto Edge menu
, specify if the port is allowed to become an edge port if it does not detect BPDUs for some duration.
The possible values are
Enable
and
Disable
. The default value is Enable.
12.
In the
Path Cost
field, set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the common and internal spanning tree.
Specify a value in the range of 0 to 200000000. The default is 0. When the path cost is set to 0, the value is updated with the external path cost from a received STP packet.
Configure Switching
129
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
13.
In the
Priority
field, specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.
The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if you attempt to set the priority to any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If you try to set it to any value between 16 and
(2*16 – 1), it is set to 16, and so on. The range is 0 to 240. The default value is 128.
14.
In the
External Port Path Cost
field, set the external path cost to a new value for the specified port in the spanning tree.
The value range is 0 to 200000000. The default is 0.
15.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
16.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 33. CST port configuration
Field
Port State
Port ID
Port Path Cost
Hello Timer
Description
The forwarding state of this port. The default is Disabled.
The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. It is made up of the port priority and the interface number of the port.
The path cost for the port. The default is 0.
The value of the parameter for the CST. The default is 2 seconds.
View CST Port Status
You can to display the common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree for a specific port on the switch.
To view the CST port status:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
Configure Switching
130
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status
.
The CST Port Status page displays.
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the page.
Table 34. CST port status
Field
Interface
Port Role
Designated Root
Designated Cost
Designated Bridge
Designated Port
Topology Change Acknowledge
Edge port
Point-to-point MAC
CST Regional Root
CST Path Cost
Port Forwarding State
Description
Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.
Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port,
Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled
Port.
Root bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base
MAC address of the bridge.
Path cost offered to the LAN by the designated port.
Bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the
LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
Identifies whether the topology change acknowledgement flag is set for the next BPDU to be transmitted for this port. It is either True or False.
Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It is either Enabled or Disabled.
Derived value of the point-to-point status.
Bridge identifier of the CST regional root. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Path cost to the CST regional root.
The forwarding state of this port.
Configure Switching
131
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View Rapid STP Information
You can view information about the Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) port status.
To view information about RSTP:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > RSTP
.
The Rapid STP page displays.
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the Rapid STP Status information displayed on the page.
Table 35. Rapid STP status information
Field
Interface
Role
Mode
Fast Link
Status
Description
The physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.
Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning tree. The port role is one of the following: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master
Port, or Disabled Port.
Specifies the spanning tree operation mode. Different modes are STP, RSTP, and MSTP.
Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port.
The forwarding state of this port.
Configure Switching
132
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Manage MST Settings
You can configure a multiple spanning tree (MST) on the switch.
Configure an MST Instance
To configure an MST instance:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration
.
The MST Configuration page displays.
6.
Configure the MST values:
• MST ID
. Specify the ID of the MST to create. The valid values for this are 1 to 4094.
This is visible only when the select option of the MST ID select box is selected.
• Priority
. The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are running
STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the priority to any value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0. The default value is 32768. The valid range is 0–61440.
• Vlan Id
. The menu includes all VLANs that are configured on the switch. You can select VLANs that must be associated with the MST instance or clear VLANs that are already associated with the MST instance.
7.
Click the
Add
button.
The MST is added.
Configure Switching
133
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the page.
Table 36. MST configuration
Field
Bridge Identifier
Last TCN
Description
The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
The time in day:hour:minute:second format since the topology of the selected MST instance last changed.
Topology Change Count Number of times that the topology changed for the selected MST instance.
Topology Change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected MST instance. It is either True or False.
Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge
Root Path Cost
Root Port
Path cost to the designated root for this MST instance.
Port to access the designated root for this MST instance.
Modify an MST Instance
To modify an MST instance:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration
.
The MST Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the instance.
You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.
Configure Switching
134
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
7.
Update the values.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete an MST Instance
To delete an MST instance:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration
.
The MST Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box for the instance.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The MST instance is removed.
Configure MST Port Settings
You can configure and display the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) settings on a specific port on the switch.
A port can become diagnostically disabled (D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a
3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.
To configure MST port settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
Configure Switching
135
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Configuration
.
The Status section and MST Port Configuration section display.
Note:
If no MST instances are configured on the switch, the page displays a
“No MSTs Available” message.
6.
From the
Select MST
menu, select the MST for which you want to configure the port settings.
7.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
8.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
9.
Configure the MST values for the selected interfaces:
• Port Priority
. The priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance. The port priority is set in multiples of 16. If you specify a value that is not a multiple of 16, the priority is set to the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 16. For example, if you set a value between 0 and 15, the priority is set to
0. If you specify a number between 16 and 31, the priority is set to 16. Specify a value in the range of 0–240. By default, the value is 128.
• Port Path Cost
. Set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected
MST instance. Specify a value in the range of 0–200000000. By default, the value is 0.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
11.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
Configure Switching
136
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page.
Table 37. MST port status information
Field Description
Operational Port Path Cost The operational path cost for the port in the MST instance.
Auto-calculated Port Path
Cost
Port ID
Indicates whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not
(Disabled). If the configured value for the port path cost is zero, the path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port.
The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
Port Up Time Since Counters
Last Cleared
The time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Port Mode
Port Forwarding State
Port Role
The Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode that is associated with the port or port channel. The possible values are Enable and Disable.
Indicates the current STP state of a port. If enabled, the port state determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic. Possible port states are as follows:
• Disabled
. STP is currently disabled on the port. The port forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses.
• Blocking
. The port is currently blocked and cannot be used to forward traffic or learn MAC addresses.
• Listening
. The port is currently in the listening mode. The port cannot forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses.
• Learning
. The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot forward traffic. However, it can learn new MAC addresses.
• Forwarding
. The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses
Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning tree. The port role is one of the following: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate
Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled Port.
Designated Root
Designated Cost
Designated Bridge
Designated Port
The root bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
The cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.
The bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
The port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the
LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
Configure Switching
137
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View STP Statistics
You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) transmitted and received on each port.
To view Spanning Tree statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Statistics
.
The STP Statistics page displays.
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the information available about the STP Statistics page.
Table 38. STP Statistics
Field
Interface
STP BPDUs Received
STP BPDUs Transmitted
RSTP BPDUs Received
RSTP BPDUs Transmitted
MSTP BPDUs Received
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted
Description
The physical or port channel interfaces of the switch.
The number of STP BPDUs received at the port.
The number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the port.
The number of RSTP BPDUs received at the port.
The number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the port.
The number of MSTP BPDUs received at the port.
The number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the port.
Configure Switching
138
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure Multicast
Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups for IPv4 multicast are identified by class D addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Host groups for IPv6 multicast are identified by the prefix ff00::/8.
View or Clear the MFDB Table
The Multicast Forwarding Database holds the port membership information for all active multicast address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC address pair.
Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.
To view or clear the MFDB Table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Selec
t Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table
.
The MFDB Table page displays.
6.
In the
Search by MAC Address
field, enter a MAC address.
Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example
00:01:23:43:45:67.
7.
Click the
Go
button.
If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.
8.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
9.
To clear the information, click the
Clear
button.
Configure Switching
139
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the information in the MFDB table.
Table 39. MFDB table information
Field
MAC Address
VLAN ID
Component
Type
Description
Interfaces
Forwarding Interfaces
Description
The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.
The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.
The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding
Database. Possible values are IGMP snooping, GMRP, Static Filtering and
MLD snooping.
The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.
The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are
Management Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.
The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering
(Flt:) for the selected address.
The list of forwarding interfaces. This list is derived from combining all forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as static filtering interfaces.
View the MFDB Statistics
To view the MFDB statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics
.
The MFDB Statistics page displays.
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
Configure Switching
140
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the MFDB Statistics fields.
Table 40. MFDB Statistics information
Field Description
Max MFDB Table Entries The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database table can hold.
Most MFDB Entries Since
Last Reset
The largest number of entries that were present in the Multicast Forwarding
Database table since last reset. This value is also known as the MFDB high-water mark.
Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.
Configure the Auto-Video Settings
You can configure the auto-video settings for multicast traffic.
To the configure auto-video settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > Auto-Video
.
The Auto-Video Configuration page displays.
6.
Select one of the following radio buttons:
•
Select the
Disable
radio button to globally disable the Auto-Video mode for the switch.
•
Select the
Enable
radio button to globally enable the Auto-Video mode for the switch.
The Auto-Video VLAN field shows the ID for the Auto-Video VLAN. By default, the VLAN
ID is 4089.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
141
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure IGMP Snooping
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.
IGMP Snooping Overview
A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the switch forwards a copy to each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the
IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes connected to the network.
This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by all connected nodes. In the case of multicast packets, however, this approach could lead to less efficient use of network bandwidth, particularly when the packet is intended for only a small number of nodes. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is receptive to the packet. While nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets addressed to unrequested group addresses, they cannot transmit new packets onto the shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded. The problem of wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in full-duplex links.
Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve this problem. The switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the network to determine which segments receive packets directed to the group address.
In addition to building and maintaining lists of multicast group memberships, the IGMP snooping switch also maintains a list of multicast routers. Multicast packets are forwarded on ports to which multicast routers are connected. With IGMP snooping, only one querier can be active in the network. All other routers in the network are suppressed and are not detectable by the switch. If a query is not received on an interface within a specified period, the interface is removed from the list of interfaces to which multicast routers are attached. However, by default, the multicast router expiration time is zero, that is, the multicast router does not expire.
A statically configured router that is connected to an interface or VLAN on the switch is automatically added to the list with learned multicast routers. The interface must be active or must be both active and a member of the VLAN.
Configure Switching
142
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure IGMP Snooping Globally
You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic.
To configure IGMP snooping globally:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Configuration
.
The IGMP Snooping Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the IGMP Snooping Status
Enable
or
Disable
radio button.
This specifies whether IGMP snooping is enabled for the switch. The default is Enable.
7.
Select the Validate IGMP IP header
Enable
or
Disable
radio button.
When IGMP IP header validation is enabled, any IGMP IP header must include the
Router Alert, ToS, and TTL information. Otherwise, the IGMP packet is discarded. The default value is Enable.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
9.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics on the page.
Table 41. IGMP Snooping Configuration information
Field
Multicast Control Frame Count
Interfaces Enabled for IGMP
Snooping
Description
The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.
The interfaces that are enabled for IGMP snooping.
Configure Switching
143
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 41. IGMP Snooping Configuration information (continued)
Field
VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP
Snooping
VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP
Snooping Querier
Description
The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping.
The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping querier.
Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces
To configure IGMP snooping for interfaces:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Interface
Configuration
.
The IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Admin Mode
menu, select
Disable
or
Enable
.
This specifies the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is Disable.
9.
In the
Host Timeout
field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.
Configure Switching
144
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.
10.
In the
Max Response Time
field, specify the time that the switch must wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface.
Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group membership interval.
11.
In the
MRouter Timeout
field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.
Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.
12.
From the
Fast Leave Mode
menu, select whether fast leave mode is enabled.
The option are
Enable
and
Disable
. The default is Disable.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
View the IGMP Snooping Table
You can view all of the entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database that were created for
IGMP snooping.
To view the entries in the IGMP snooping table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Table
.
The IGMP Snooping Table page displays.
6.
In the
Search By MAC Address
field, specify the MAC address whose MFDB table entry you want to view.
Configure Switching
145
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example
00:01:23:43:45:67.
7.
Click the
Go
button.
If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.
8.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
9.
To clear the information, click the
Clear
button.
The following table describes the information in the IGMP snooping table.
Table 42. IGMP Snooping Table information
Field
MAC Address
VLAN ID
Type
Description
Interface
Description
The multicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding and/or filtering information. The format is six two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example, 01:00:5e:45:67:89.
The VLAN ID for which the switch holds forwarding and filtering information.
The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.
The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are
Management Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.
The interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd) and filtering (Flt) for the associated address.
Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs
To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration
.
Configure Switching
146
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, in the
VLAN ID
field, enter the VLAN ID.
7.
Configure the IGMP snooping values:
• Admin Mode
. Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The default is Disable.
• Fast Leave Mode
. Enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave mode for the specified VLAN ID. The default is Disable.
• Host Timeout
. Set the value for group membership interval of IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is Maximum Response Time + 1 to 3600 seconds.
• Maximum Response Time
. Set the value for the maximum response time of IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 to Group Membership
Interval –1. This value must be greater than group membership interval value.
• MRouter Timeout
. Set the value for multicast router expiry time of IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• Report Suppression Mode
. Enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression mode for the specified VLAN ID. IGMP snooping report suppression allows the suppression of the IGMP reports sent by the multicast hosts by building a Layer 3 membership table. The results is that only the most essential reports are sent to the
IGMP routers so that the routers can continue to receive the multicast traffic.The default is Disable.
• Querier Mode
. Enable or disable the IGMP querier mode. If proxy querier mode is disabled, then an IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to an IGMP leave packet. The default is Disable.
• Query Interval
. Set the IGMP query interval for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 to 1800 seconds. The default is 60 seconds.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Modify IGMP Snooping Settings for a VLAN
To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure Switching
147
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration
.
The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.
7.
Update the values.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Disable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN
To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration
.
The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
Snooping is disabled on the VLAN and the VLAN is removed from the table.
Configure Multicast Router Interfaces for IGMP Snooping
You can configure an interface as the designated interface to which a multicast router is attached. All IGMP packets snooped by the switch are forwarded to the multicast router reachable from this interface. Configuring a multicast router interface is usually not required because the switch automatically detects the multicast router and forwards IGMP packets
Configure Switching
148
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
accordingly. It is required only if you want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.
To configure multicast router interfaces:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration
.
The Multicast Router Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
In the
Multicast Router
field, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a Multicast Router VLAN for IGMP Snooping
You can configure an interface to forward snooped IGMP packets only from a specific VLAN to the multicast router that is attached to the interface. This configuration is usually not required because the switch automatically detects a multicast router and forwards the IGMP packets accordingly. However, in a complex network, it might be required if you want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch.
To configure a multicast router VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
Configure Switching
149
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN
Configuration
.
The Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface.
7.
In the
VLAN ID
field, enter the VLAN ID.
8.
From the
Multicast Router
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier
An IGMP snooping querier is a device that queries devices on the network for multicast membership.
IGMP Snooping Querier Overview
IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to the port where the end device is located.
You can configure and display information about IGMP snooping queriers on the network and, separately, on VLANs.
Configure Switching
150
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure the Global IGMP Snooping Querier Settings
You can configure the global settings for an IGMP snooping querier.
To configure the global IGMP snooping querier settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier Configuration
.
The Querier Configuration page displays.
6.
Configure the following settings:
• Querier Admin Mode
. Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is Enable.
• Snooping Querier Address
. Enter the snooping querier IP address to be used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries. This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent.
• IGMP Version
. Specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.
The range is 1 to 2. The default value is 2.
• Query Interval(secs)
. Specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 and
1800. The default value is 60.
• Querier Expiry Interval(secs)
. Specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed. The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 and 300. The default value is 125.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
8.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The page lists the VLAN IDs for the VLANs on which the IGMP snooping querier feature is enabled.
Configure Switching
151
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier for a VLAN
You can configure an IGMP snooping querier for use with a VLAN on the network.
To configure an IGMP querier snooping for a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration
.
The Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
VLAN ID
menu, select
New Entry
.
7.
Configure the following settings:
• VLAN ID
. The VLAN ID for which the IGMP snooping querier is to be enabled.
• Querier Election Participate Mode
. Enable or disable querier this mode:
Disable
. Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.
Enable
. The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the lowest
IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to non-querier state.
• Snooping Querier VLAN Address
. Specify the snooping querier IP address to be used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
152
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Remove an IGMP Snooping Querier From a VLAN
You can remove an IGMP snooping querier from a VLAN.
To remove an IGMP snooping querier from a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration
.
The Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
VLAN ID
menu, select the VLAN ID.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
Your settings are saved. The IGMP snooping querier is no longer supported on the VLAN.
The VLAN itself is not deleted.
Display the IGMP Snooping Querier Status for VLANs
To display the IGMP snooping querier status for VLANs:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
Configure Switching
153
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Status
.
The Querier VLAN Status page displays.
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 43. Querier VLAN Status information
Field
VLAN ID
Operational State
Description
The VLAN ID on which IGMP snooping querier is enabled.
The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the following states:
• Querier
. The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch finds a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.
• Non-Querier
. The snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN.
If the querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping switch moves into querier mode.
• Disabled
. The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured.
Operational Version
Last Querier Address
The operational IGMP protocol version of the querier.
The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the
VLAN.
Last Querier Version The IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.
Operational Max Response Time The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping querier.
Configure MLD Snooping
In IPv4, Layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping to limit the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that multicast traffic is forwarded to only those interfaces associated with IP multicast address. In IPv6, MLD snooping performs a similar function. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all ports in a VLAN. This list is constructed by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
MLD Snooping Overview
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a protocol used by IPv6 multicast routers to discover the presence of multicast listeners (nodes that must receive IPv6 multicast packets) on its directly attached links and to discover which multicast packets are of interest to neighboring
Configure Switching
154
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
nodes. MLD is derived from IGMP; MLD version 1 (MLDv1) is equivalent to IGMPv2 and
MLD version 2 (MLDv2) is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD is a subprotocol of Internet Control
Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6), and MLD messages are a subset of ICMPv6 messages, identified in IPv6 packets by a preceding Next Header value of 58.
The switch can snoop on both MLDv1 and MLDv2 protocol packets and bridge IPv6 multicast data based on destination IPv6 Multicast MAC Addresses. The switch can be configured to perform MLD snooping and IGMP snooping simultaneously.
In addition to building and maintaining lists of multicast group memberships, the MLD snooping switch also maintains a list of multicast routers. Multicast packets are forwarded on ports to which multicast routers are connected. With MLD snooping, only one querier can be active in the network. All other routers in the network are suppressed and are not detectable by the switch. If a query is not received on an interface within a specified period, the interface is removed from the list of interfaces to which multicast routers are attached. However, by default, the multicast router expiration time is zero, that is, the multicast router does not expire.
A statically configured router that is connected to an interface or VLAN on the switch is automatically added to the list with learned multicast routers. The interface must be active or must be both active and a member of the VLAN.
Enable MLD Snooping
You can enable MLD snooping.
To enable MLD snooping:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Configuration
.
The MLD Snooping Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the MLD Snooping Admin Mode
Enable
radio button.
By default, the
Enable
radio button is selected.
Configure Switching
155
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
8.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable MLD Snooping Configuration fields.
Table 44. MLD Snooping Configuration information
Field
Multicast Control Frame Count
Interfaces Enabled for MLD
Snooping
VLAN IDs Enabled For MLD
Snooping
Definition
The number of multicast control frames that were processed by the CPU.
The interfaces on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled. MLD snooping must be enabled globally and on an interface for the interface to be able to snoop MLD packets to determine which segments must receive multicast packets directed to the group address.
The VLANs on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled.
Configure an MLD Snooping Interface
To configure an MLD snooping interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Interface Configuration
.
The MLD Snooping Interface Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
Configure Switching
156
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Admin Mode
menu, select to enable or disable the interface mode for the selected interface for MLD snooping for the switch.
The default is Disable.
9.
In the
Membership Interval
field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.
The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds. The configured value must be greater than the maximum response time. The default is 260 seconds.
10.
In the
Max Response Time in seconds
field, specify the time that the switch must wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface.
Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group membership interval.
11.
In the
Expiration Time
field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query on an interface before removing the interface from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.
Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.
12.
From the
Fast Leave
menu, select to enable or disable Fast Leave on the interface.
If Fast Leave is enabled, the interface can be immediately removed from the Layer 2 forwarding table when the switch receives an MLD leave message for a multicast group without first sending MAC-based general queries. The default is Disable.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure MLD Snooping for VLANs
To configure MLD snooping for a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure Switching
157
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration
.
The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
VLAN ID
field, specify the VLAN IDs for which MLD snooping must be enabled.
7.
From the
Fast Leave
menu, select to enable or disable the MLD snooping Fast Leave mode for the specified VLAN ID.
8.
In the
Membership Interval
field, set the value for the group membership interval of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.
The valid range is Maximum Response Time + 1 to 3600.
9.
In the
Maximum Response Time
field, set the value for the maximum response time of
MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.
The valid range is 1 to Group Membership Interval –1. This value must be less than the group membership interval value.
10.
In the
Multicast Router Expiry Time
field, set the value for the multicast router expiry time of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.
The valid range is 0 to 3600.
11.
Click the
Add
button.
MLD snooping is enabled on the specified VLAN.
Remove MLD Snooping From a VLAN
You can remove MLD snooping from a VLAN.
To remove MLD snooping from a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
Configure Switching
158
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration
.
The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box for the VLAN ID.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
Your settings are saved. MLD snooping is no longer supported on the VLAN. The VLAN itself is not deleted.
Configure a Multicast Router Interface for MLD Snooping
To configure a multicast router interface for MLD snooping:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration
.
The Multicast Router Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Multicast Router
menu, select to enable or disable the multicast router for the selected interfaces.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
159
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure a Multicast Router VLAN for MLD Snooping
To configure a multicast router VLAN for MLD snooping:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN Configuration
.
The Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface for which you want the multicast router to be enabled.
7.
In the
VLAN ID
field, specify the VLAN ID.
8.
From the
Multicast Router
menu, select to enable or disable the multicast router for the
VLAN.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure an MLD Snooping Querier
You can configure the settings for an MLD snooping querier.
To configure an MLD snooping querier:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure Switching
160
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier Configuration
.
The MLD Snooping Querier Configuration page displays.
6.
Configure the following settings:
• Querier Admin Mode
. Enable or disable MLD snooping for the switch. The default is
Disable.
• Querier Address
. Enter an IP address. This specifies the snooping querier address to be used as the source address in periodic MLD queries. This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent. The supported
IPv6 formats are x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x and x::x.
• MLD Version
. The MLD protocol used in periodic MLD queries is version 1. This value is not configurable.
• Query Interval (secs)
. Specify the interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 to 1800.
The default value is 60.
• Querier Expiry Interval (secs)
. Specify the interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed. The querier expiry interval must be a value in the range of 60 to 300. The default value is 60.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The page displays the IDs of the VLANS for which the MLD snooping querier is enabled.
Configure an MLD Snooping Querier for a VLAN
You can configure an MLD snooping querier for use with a VLAN on the network.
To configure an MLD snooping querier for a VLAN
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure Switching
161
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration
.
The MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
VLAN ID
field, specify the VLAN ID on which the MLD snooping querier must be enabled and for which a VLAN exists in the VLAN database.
7.
From the
Querier Election Participate Mode
menu, select to enable or disable the querier participation election mode for MLD snooping.
When this mode is disabled, on detecting another querier of same version in the VLAN, the snooping querier moves to a non-querier state. When this mode is enabled, the snooping querier participates in querier election where the lowest IP address wins the querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to non-querier state.
8.
In the
Querier VLAN Address
field, specify the snooping querier address to be used as the source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN.
9.
Click the
Add
button.
Your settings are saved and the MLD snooping querier is added on the VLAN.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 45. MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration information
Field
Operational State
Description
The operational state of the MLD snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the following states:
• Querier
. Snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.
• Non-Querier
. Snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If the querier expiry interval timer is expired, the snooping switch moves into querier mode.
• Disabled
. Snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping querier moves to disabled mode when MLD snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured.
Operational Version The operational MLD protocol version of the querier.
Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.
Last Querier Version The MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the
VLAN.
Operational Max
Response Time
The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping querier.
Configure Switching
162
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Remove an MLD Snooping Querier From a VLAN
You can remove an MLD snooping querier from a VLAN.
To remove an MLD snooping querier from a VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration
.
The MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box for the VLAN ID.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
Your settings are saved. The MLD snooping querier is no longer supported on the VLAN.
The VLAN itself is not deleted.
View, Search, and Configure the MAC Address Table
You can view or configure the MAC address table. This table contains information about unicast entries for which the switch holds forwarding or filtering information. The transparent bridging function uses the forwarding database entries to determine how to forward an incoming frame.
View and Search the MAC Address Table
You can use the search function for the MAC address table to display information about the entries in the table.
To view and search the MAC address table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
Configure Switching
163
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Address Table > Basic > Address Table
.
The MAC Address Table page displays.
6.
Use the
Search
menu and field to search for a MAC address, VLAN ID, or interface number and display the information:
• Search by MAC Address
. From the
Search
menu, select
MAC Address
, and enter the 6-byte hexadecimal MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, for example, 01:23:45:67:89:AB. Then click the
Go
button.
If the address exists, that entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining (higher) MAC addresses. An exact match is required.
• Search by VLAN ID
. From the
Search
menu, select
VLAN ID
, and enter the VLAN ID, for example, 100. Then click the
Go
button.
• Search by Interface
. From the
Search
menu, select
Interface
, and enter the interface
ID using the respective interface naming convention (for example, g1 or l1). Then click the
Go
button.
7.
To refresh the information on the page, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 46. MAC Address Table information
Field
Total MAC Address
VLAN ID
MAC Address
Description
The number of total MAC addresses learned or configured.
The VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.
The unicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding, filtering information, or both. The format is a 6-byte MAC address that is separated by colons, for example
01:23:45:67:89:AB.
Configure Switching
164
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 46. MAC Address Table information (continued)
Field
Interface
Status
Description
The interface on which the address was learned.
The status of this entry, which can be one of the following:
• Static
. The instance was added by the system or a user and cannot be relearned.
• Learned
. The instance was learned, and is being used.
• Management
. The value of the corresponding instance for the system MAC address is also the value of an existing instance for dot1dStaticAddress.
Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval
You can set the address aging interval for the specified forwarding database.
To set the address aging interval:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Dynamic Address
.
The Dynamic Address page displays.
6.
In the
Address Aging Timeout (seconds)
field, specify the time-out period in seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.
The value can be any number between 10 and 1000000 seconds. The default is 300.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching
165
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Add a Static MAC Address
You can manually add MAC addresses to the MAC address table. Such MAC addresses are static MAC addresses.
To add a static MAC address:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address
.
The page displays the Port List section and the Static MAC ADdress Table section.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface.
7.
In the
Static MAC Address
field, enter the MAC address.
8.
From the
VLAN ID
menu, select the VLAN ID that must be associated with the MAC address.
9.
Click the
Add
button.
The static MAC address is added to the MAC address table.
Remove a Static MAC Address
You can manually remove static MAC addresses from the MAC address table.
To add a static MAC address:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
Configure Switching
166
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address
.
The page displays the Port List section and the Static MAC ADdress Table section.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface.
7.
Select the check box for the static MAC address.
You can select multiple MAC addresses.
8.
Click the
Delete
button.
The static MAC address is removed from the MAC address table.
Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection
Loops inside a network are costly because they consume resources and reduce the performance of the network. Detecting loops manually can be cumbersome.
The switch can automatically identify loops in the network. You can enable loop protection per port or globally.
If loop protection is enabled, the switch sends predefined PDU packets to a Layer 2 multicast destination address (09:00:09:09:13:A6) on all ports for which the feature is enabled. You can selectively disable PDU packet transmission for loop protection on specific ports even while port loop protection is enabled. If the switch receives a packet with the previously mentioned multicast destination address, the source MAC address in the packet is compared with the
MAC address of the switch. If the MAC address does not match, the packet is forwarded to all ports that are members of the same VLAN, just like any other multicast packet. The packet is not forwarded to the port from which it was received.
If the source MAC address matches the MAC address of the switch, the switch can perform one of the following actions, depending on how you configure the action:
•
The port is shut down.
•
A log message is generated. (If a syslog server is configured, the log message can be sent to the syslog server.)
•
The port is shut down and a log message is generated.
If loop protection is disabled, the multicast packet is silently dropped.
Loop protection is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks between spanning tree–aware switches. It is intended for unmanaged switches that drop spanning tree BPDUs. Loop protection detects physical and logical loops between Ethernet ports on a device. You must
Configure Switching
167
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
enable loop protection globally before you can enable and configure it at the interface level.
Loop protection is supported on physical interfaces and static LAG interfaces, but not on dynamic LAG interfaces.
Configure Global Layer 2 Loop Protection
To configure global Layer 2 loop protection:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration
.
6.
To enable or disable loop protection, select the Admin Mode
Enable
or
Disable
radio button.
The default is Enable.
7.
From the
Transmit Interval
menu, select the time in seconds between transmission of loop packets.
The default transmit interval is 5 seconds.
8.
From the
Max PDU Receive
menu, select the maximum number of packets to be received before an action is taken.
The default is 1.
9.
In the
Disable Timer
field, enter the time in seconds after which a port is disabled when a loop is detected.
The range is from 0 to 604800 seconds. The default is 0 seconds.
Configure Switching
168
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection on a Port
To configure Layer 2 loop protection on a port:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration
.
6.
Use one of the following methods to narrow down the ports that are displayed:
•
To display all the physical ports, click the
1
link.
•
To display all LAGs only, click the
LAG
link.
•
To display all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
Configure Switching
169
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
In the
Go To Port
field, type the port number, for example g18, and click the
Go
button.
7.
In the
Port
field, select the port for which data is to be displayed or configured.
8.
From the
Keep Alive
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
to specify whether keep-alives are enabled on an interface.
The default is Disable.
9.
From the
RX Action
menu, select the action that occurs when the switch detects a loop on an interface:
• Log
. The switch logs a message.
• Disable
. The switch disables the interface. This is the default action.
• Both
. The switch both logs a message and disables the interface.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
11.
To show the latest information on the page, click the
Refresh
button.
12.
To clear all the statistics in the table, click the
Clear
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 47. L2 Loop Protection Interface Information
Field
Loop Detected
Loop Count
Time Since Last Loop
Port Status
Description
Shows whether a loop is detected on the interface. If the interface is disabled and then reenabled, the status changes back to No.
The number of packets that were received after the loop was detected.
The time that elapsed since the loop was detected.
The status of the interface (Enabled, Disabled, or D-Disabled, which stands for diagnostically disabled).
Configure Switching
170
4.
Configuring Routing
This chapter covers the following topics.
•
How the Switch Handles Routing
•
•
•
•
•
Configure Routes and View Routes
•
4
171
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
How the Switch Handles Routing
For each incoming packet, the switch uses the destination MAC address to determine if the address matches a configured routing interface. If it does, the switch searches the host table for a matching destination IP address:
• The host table contains a matching IP address
.The packet is routed to the host.
• The host table does not contain a matching IP address
. The switch searches for the longest prefix match on the destination IP address:
A match occurs
. The packet is routed to the next hop.
No match occurs but a default route exists
. The packet is routed to the next hop that is specified in the default route.
No match occurs and no default route exists
. The packet is dropped.
The routing table can include entries that were manually added. The host table can include entries that were manually added or dynamically added through ARP.
Enable the Routing Mode
By default, the routing mode is disabled on the switch. You can enable the routing mode to let the switch route traffic through its interfaces.
You can also enable routing for a VLAN interface (see
on page 194) and use the VLAN routing wizard to create a VLAN routing interface (see
Configure VLAN Routing With the VLAN Routing Wizard
To enable routing on the switch:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > IP > IP Configuration
.
The IP Configuration page displays.
Configuring Routing
172
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
Select the Routing Mode
Enable
radio button.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 48. IP Configuration information
Field
Default Time to Live
Maximum Next Hops
Description
The default value that is inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. The default value is 64.
The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. The default value is 1.
View the IP Statistics
The IP Statistics page displays the IP statistics conform RFC 1213.
To display the IP statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > IP > Statistics
.
The IP Statistics page displays.
Configuring Routing
173
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 49. IP routing statistics information
Field
IpInReceives
IpInHdrErrors
IpInAddrErrors
IpForwDatagrams
IpInUnknownProtos
IpInDiscards
IpInDelivers
IpOutRequests
IpOutDiscards
IpOutNoRoutes
IpReasmTimeout
IpReasmReqds
IpReasmOKs
Description
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error.
The number of input datagrams discarded because of errors in IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so on.
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in the IP header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity.
This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported classes (for example, Class E). For entities that are not IP gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.
The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not the final IP destination, which caused the switch to attempt to forward them to the final destination. In entities that do not act as IP gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed via this entity, and the source-route option processing was successful.
The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting reassembly.
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols
(including ICMP).
The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). This counter includes datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this discretionary discard criterion.
The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion. This includes any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.
The maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.
The number of IP fragments received that needed to be reassembled at this entity.
The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.
Configuring Routing
174
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 49. IP routing statistics information (continued)
Field
IpReasmFails
IpFragOKs
IpFragFails
IpFragCreates
IpRoutingDiscards
IcmpInMsgs
IcmpInErrors
IcmpInDestUnreachs
IcmpInTimeExcds
IcmpInParmProbs
IcmpInSrcQuenchs
IcmpInRedirects
IcmpInEchos
IcmpInEchoReps
IcmpInTimestamps
IcmpInTimestampReps
IcmpInAddrMasks
IcmpInAddrMaskReps
IcmpOutMsgs
IcmpOutErrors
IcmpOutDestUnreachs
IcmpOutTimeExcds
Description
The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for example, because of timing out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments because some algorithms can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.
The number of IP datagrams that were successfully fragmented at this entity.
The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for example, because their Don’t
Fragment flag was set.
The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity.
The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they were valid.
One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free buffer space for other routing entries.
The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.
The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but that included
ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.
The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received.
The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.
The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send. This counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.
The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send because of problems discovered within ICMP, such as a lack of buffers. This value does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer, such as the inability of IP to route the resulting datagram.
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.
Configuring Routing
175
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 49. IP routing statistics information (continued)
Field
IcmpOutParmProbs
IcmpOutSrcQuenchs
IcmpOutRedirects
IcmpOutEchos
IcmpOutEchoReps
IcmpOutTimestamps
IcmpOutTimestampReps
IcmpOutAddrMasks
Description
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.
The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent.
The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. Because hosts do not send redirects, this counter is always zero for a host.
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages.
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.
Configure IPv6 Routing
Note:
IPv6 is supported on VLAN interfaces only, not on physical ports.
Configure the IPv6 Global Routing Settings
You can configure IPv6 the global routing settings for the switch (as opposed to the IPv6 settings for an interface).
To configure the IPv6 global routing settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Basic > Global Configuration
.
Configuring Routing
176
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The IPv6 Global Configuration page displays.
6.
To globally enable IPv6 unicast routing, select the IPv6 Unicast Routing
Enable
radio button.
By default, IPv6 unicast routing is disabled and the
Disable
radio button is selected.
7.
In the
Hop Limit
field, enter the number for the unicast hop count that is used in IPv6 packets that originate in the switch.
The value is also included in router advertisements. The valid values for hops are 1 through 255. The default is 64.
8.
In the
ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval
field, enter the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.
This value controls the ICMPv6 error packets. The default rate limit is 100 packets per second, meaning that the burst interval is 1000 mseconds. To disable ICMP rate limiting, enter
0
. The valid rate interval must be in the range from 0 to 2147483647 mseconds.
9.
In the
ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size
field, enter the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.
This value controls the ICMP error packets. The default burst size is 100 packets. The valid burst size is 1 to 200. (Do not enter 0.)
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
View the IPv6 Route Table
To view the IPv6 Route Table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table
.
The IPv6 Routing Table page displays.
6.
From the
Routes Displayed
menu, select one of the following options:
Configuring Routing
177
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• All Routes
. Show all active IPv6 routes.
• Best Routes Only
. Show only the best active routes.
• Configured Routes Only
. Show only the manually configured routes.
7.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Update
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 50. IPv6 Route Table information
Field
Number of Routes
IPv6 Prefix
Prefix Length
Protocol
Next Hop Interface
Next Hop IP Address
Preference
Description
The total number of active routes in the route table.
The network prefix for the active route.
The prefix length for the active route.
The type of protocol for the active route.
The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next hop would be a
Null0
interface.
The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.
The route preference of the configured route.
Configure IPv6 VLAN Interface Settings
For you to be able to configure IPv6 VLAN interface setting, IPv6 must be configured for the network interface, IPv6 global routing must be enabled, and a routing VLAN must exist. For more information, see the following sections:
•
Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface
•
Configure the IPv6 Global Routing Settings
•
IPv6 is supported on VLAN interfaces only, not on physical ports.
Configure IPv6 VLAN interface settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configuring Routing
178
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > VLAN Configuration
.
The IPv6 Global Configuration page displays.
6.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
7.
From the
IPv6 Mode
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
When IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global address. In this case, an EUI-64-based link-local address is used. The default value is
Disable.
8.
From the
DHCPv6 Client Mode
menu, select to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client mode on an interface.
Only one interface can function as a client. The default value is Disable.
9.
From the
Stateless Address AutoConfig Mode
menu, select to enable or disable the stateless address autoconfiguration mode on an interface.
The default value is Disable.
10.
From the
Admin Mode
menu, select to enable or disable the IPv6 mode.
The default is
Disable
. When the IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global address. In this case, an EUI-64-based link-local address is used.
11.
In the
MTU
field, specify the maximum transmit unit (MTU) for an interface.
If the value is 0, then this interface is not enabled for routing. It is not valid to set this value to 0 if routing is enabled. The MTU range 1280 to 9198. The default is 1800.
12.
In the
Duplicate Address Detection Transmits
field, specify the number of duplicate address detection (DAD) transmits on an interface.
The DAD transmits value must be in the range 0 to 600. The default is 1.
13.
In the
Life Time Interval
field, specify the router advertisement life time interval that is sent from the interface.
This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval.
0 means do not use the VLAN interface as the default routing interface. The range of router life time is 0 to 9000. The default is 1800.
Configuring Routing
179
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
14.
In the
Adv NS Interval
field, specify the retransmission time of router advertisements that are sent from the interface.
A value of 0 means the interval is not specified. The range of the neighbor solicit interval is 1000 to 4294967295. The default is 0.
15.
In the
Adv Reachable Interval
field, specify the router advertisement time.
This is the time allocated to consider the neighbors reachable after ND confirmation. The range of reachable time is 0 to 3600000. The default is 0.
16.
Use the
Adv Interval
field to specify the maximum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface.
The range of the maximum advertisement interval is 4 to 1800. The default value is 600.
17.
From the
Adv Managed Config Flag
menu, specify the setting for the router advertisement managed address configuration flag.
When the selection is
Enable
, end nodes use DHCPv6. When the selection is
Disable
, end nodes autoconfigure addresses. The default value is Disable.
18.
From the
Adv Other Config Flag
menu, select to enable or disable the router advertisement other stateful configuration flag.
The default value is Disable.
19.
From the
Router Preference
menu, specify the router preference advertisement on an interface.
The default value is Medium.
20.
From the
Adv Suppress Flag
menu, select to enable or disable the router advertisement suppression on an interface.
The default value is Disable.
21.
From the
Destination Unreachables
menu, select to enable or disable the mode for sending ICMPv6 destination unreachable messages on this interface.
If this mode is disabled, the interface does not send ICMPv6 destination unreachable messages. The default value is Enable.
22.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 51. IPv6 VLAN Configuration information
Field
Routing Mode
Operational Mode
Link State
Description
Displays the routing mode of an interface. The default is Disable.
Specifies the operational state of an interface. The default value is
Disable.
Indicates whether the link is up or down.
Configuring Routing
180
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Manage IPv6 Prefixes for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN
When you add an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN, the prefix is advertised on all interfaces that are members of the VLAN. You can change and remove existing IPv6 prefixes.
Add an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN
To add an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration
.
The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface
Configuration table.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface to be configured.
When the selection is changed, the page refreshes, causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected interface.
7.
In the
Ipv6 Prefix
field, specify the IPv6 prefix for an interface.
8.
In the
Prefix Length
field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for an interface.
9.
From the
EUI64
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
to indicate whether the specified 64-bit unicast prefix is enabled.
10.
In the
Valid Life Time
field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.
This is the time allowed to consider the prefix valid for the purpose of on-link determination. The valid life time is 0 to 4294967295.
11.
In the
Preferred Life Time
field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.
An autoconfigured address generated from this prefix is preferred. The preferred life time must be in the range 0 to 4294967295.
Configuring Routing
181
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
12.
From the
Onlink Flag
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
to specify whether the selected prefix can be used for on-link determination.
The default is
Enable
.
13.
From the
Autonomous Flag
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
to specify whether the selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration.
The default value is Enable.
The Current State field displays the state of the IPV6 address. The state is TENT if routing is disabled or DAD fails. The state is Active if the interface is active and DAD is successful.
14.
Click the
Add
button.
The IPv6 address prefix is added to the interface.
Change the Settings for an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN
You can change the settings for a prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN.
To change the settings for an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration
.
The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface
Configuration table.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the VLAN.
7.
Select the check box for the IPv6 prefix.
The settings display in the fields in the table heading.
8.
Change the settings as needed.
Configuring Routing
182
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Remove an IPv6 Prefix From an IPv6 VLAN
You can remove one or more IPv6 prefixes from an IPv6 VLAN. You cannot remove the default IPv6 prefix.
To remove one or more IPv6 prefixes from an IPv6 VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration
.
The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface
Configuration table.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the VLAN.
7.
Select the check boxes for the IPv6 prefixes.
8.
Click the
Delete
button.
The IPv6 prefixes are removed from the IPv6 VLAN.
View IPv6 Statistics
To display the IPv6 statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
Configuring Routing
183
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Statistics
.
The IPv6 Statistics page displays.
6.
From the
Interface
menu, select the interface.
When the selection is changed, the page refreshes, causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected interface.
7.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Update
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 52. IPv6 Statistics information
Field
Total Datagrams Received
Received Datagrams Locally
Delivered
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To Header Errors
Description
The total number of input datagrams received by the interface, including those received in error.
The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 user-protocols (including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6 headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors, hop count exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options, and so on.
The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface.
The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination.
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To MTU
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To No Route
Received Datagrams With Unknown
Protocol
The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To Invalid Address
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, ::0) and unsupported addresses (such as addresses with unallocated prefixes).
For entities that are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.
Configuring Routing
184
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 52. IPv6 Statistics information (continued)
Field
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To Truncated Data
Description
The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame did not carry enough data.
Received Datagrams Discarded
Other
The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting reassembly.
Received Datagrams Reassembly
Required
The number of IPv6 fragments received that needed to be reassembled at this interface. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the fragments.
Datagrams Successfully
Reassembled
Datagrams Failed To Reassemble The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the fragments.
Datagrams Forwarded
The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments.
The number of output datagrams that this entity received and forwarded to their final destinations. In entities that do not act as IPv6 routers, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this entity, and the source-route processing was successful. For a successfully forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented.
Datagrams Locally Transmitted
Datagrams Transmit Failed
Datagrams Successfully
Fragmented
Datagrams Failed To Fragment
The number of datagrams that this entity successfully transmitted from this output interface.
The number of datagrams that this entity failed to transmit successfully.
The number of IPv6 datagrams that were fragmented at this output interface.
The number of output datagrams that could not be fragmented at this interface.
Datagrams Fragments Created
Multicast Datagrams Received
Multicast Datagrams Transmitted
The number of output datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation at this output interface.
The number of multicast packets received by the interface.
The number of multicast packets transmitted by the interface.
Configuring Routing
185
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the nonconfigurable ICMPv6 information displayed on the page.
Table 53. ICMPv6 Statistics information
Field
ICMPv6 Messages With Errors
Received
Description
Total ICMPv6 Messages Received The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface, which includes all those counted by IPv6IfIcmpInErrors. This interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed, which might not be the input interface for the messages.
The number of ICMP messages that the interface received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).
ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable
Messages Received
ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited
Administratively Received
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by the interface.
The number of ICMP destination unreachable/communication administratively prohibited messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Parameter Problem
Messages Received
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages
Received
ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the interface.
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages
Received
ICMPv6 Router Advertisement
Messages Received
The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface.
The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement
Messages Received
ICMPv6 Redirect Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by the interface.
The number of ICMPv6 Redirect messaged received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Group Membership Query
Messages Received
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Group Membership
Response Messages Received
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages received by the interface.
Configuring Routing
186
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 53. ICMPv6 Statistics information (continued)
Field
ICMPv6 Group Membership
Reduction Messages Received
Description
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages received by the interface.
Total ICMPv6 Messages
Transmitted
The total number of ICMP messages that this interface attempted to send.
This counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.
ICMPv6 Messages Not Transmitted
Due To Error
The number of ICMP messages that this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.
ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable
Messages Transmitted
ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited
Administratively Transmitted
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent by the interface.
Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable/Communication
Administratively Prohibited messages sent.
ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Parameter Problem
Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages
Transmitted
ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent by the interface.
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages
Transmitted
ICMPv6 Router Advertisement
Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface.
The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement
Messages Transmitted
ICMPv6 Redirect Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the interface.
The number of Redirect messages sent.
ICMPv6 Group Membership Query
Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent.
ICMPv6 Group Membership
Response Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent.
Configuring Routing
187
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 53. ICMPv6 Statistics information (continued)
Field
ICMPv6 Group Membership
Reduction Messages Transmitted
Description
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent.
ICMPv6 Duplicate Address Detects The number of duplicate addresses detected by the interface.
View the IPv6 Neighbor Table
To view or clear the IPv6 Neighbor Table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Neighbor Table
.
The IPv6 Neighbor Table page displays.
6.
Use the
Search
menu and field to search for IPv6 routes by IPv6 address or interface number:
• Search by IPv6 address
. Select
IPv6 Address
from the
Search
menu. Enter the
128-byte hexadecimal IPv6 address in four-digit groups separated by colons, for example, 2001:231F:::1. Then click the
Go
button.
If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.
• Search by Interface
. Select
Interface
from the
Search
menu. Enter the interface using the respective naming convention (for example, g1 or l1). Then click the
Go
button.
If the address exists, the entry is displayed.
7.
To clear the IPv6 neighbors on a selected interface or on all interfaces, click the
Clear
button.
8.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Update
button.
Configuring Routing
188
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 54. IPv6 Neighbor Table information
Field
Interface
IPv6 Address
MAC Address isRtr
Neighbor State
Last Updated
Description
The interface whose settings are displayed in the current table row.
The IPv6 address of the neighbor or interface.
The MAC address associated with an interface.
Indicates whether the neighbor is a router. If the neighbor is a router, the value is True. If the neighbor is not a router, the value is False.
The state of the neighbor cache entry. Following are the states for dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache:
• Incmp
. Address resolution is being performed on the entry. A neighbor solicitation message was sent to the solicited-node multicast address of the target, but the corresponding neighbor advertisement message is not yet received.
• Reach
. Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable
Time milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was functioning properly. While in REACH state, the device takes no special action as packets are sent.
• Stale
. More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly. While in STALE state, the device takes no action until a packet is sent.
• Delay
. More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly. A packet was sent within the last
DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds. If no reachability confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds of entering the DELAY state, send a neighbor solicitation message and change the state to PROBE.
• Probe
. Seeks a reachability confirmation by resending neighbor solicitation messages every Retrans Timer milliseconds until a reachability confirmation is received.
Time since the address was confirmed to be reachable.
Manage Static IPv6 Routes
You can configure static and default routes with a single next hop to any destination. You can also delete an individual next hop from a static route or an entire static route.
The switch supports a maximum of 32 static routes. The cost of a static route is always 0.
On the switch, routing provides a preference option for the configuration of default routes. A configured default route is treated exactly a a static route. Therefore, default routes and static routes contain the same default preference.
The platform supports up to 16 IPv6 static routes and up to 16 VLAN routing interfaces. The network ports are logical management interfaces. The IP stack’s routing table contains both
Configuring Routing
189
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
IPv6 routes associated with these management interfaces and IPv6 routes associated with routing interfaces. Configuration of 127-bit IPv6 prefixes on the routing/host IPv6 interfaces is supported. You can distinguishes between static routes by specifying a route preference value. A static route with a lower preference value is a more preferred static route. On a
VLAN routing interface, for example, vlan 10), you can enable IPv4 routing and IPv6 routing independently.
Add a Static IPV6 Route
To add a static IPv6 route:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration
.
The Configure Routes page displays.
6.
In the
IPv6 Prefix
field, specify the IPv6 network prefix for the configured route.
7.
In the
Prefix Length
field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for the configured route.
8.
From the
Next Hop IPv6 Address Type
menu, select one of the following options:
• Global
. Select this option if the IPv6 address is a global IPv6 address.
• Link-Local
. Select this option if the next hop IPv6 address is a link-local IPv6 address. You must specify a next hop IPv6 address in the
Next Hop IPv6 Address
field.
• Static-Reject
. Select this option to create a static-reject route for a destination prefix.
You do not need to specify a next hop IPv6 address.
9.
If the selection from the
Next Hop IPv6 Address Type
menu is
Global
or
Link-Local
, enter the next hop IPv6 address in the
Next Hop IPv6 Address
field.
10.
If the selection from the
Next Hop IPv6 Address Type
menu is
Link-Local
, from the
Interface
menu, select the interface that connects to the IPv6 next hop.
11.
In the
Preference
field, specify the router preference.
Configuring Routing
190
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
12.
Click the
Add
button.
The route is added.
Change the Preference for a Static IPv6 Route
To change the preference for a static IPv6 route:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration
.
The Configure Routes page displays.
6.
Select the check box for the static IPv6 route.
7.
In the
Preference
field, specify another router preference.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Remove Static IPv6 Routes
To remove one or more static IPv6 routes:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configuring Routing
191
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration
.
The Configure Routes page displays.
6.
Select one or more check boxes for static IPv6 routes.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The route or routes are removed from the switch.
View the IPv6 Route Table
To view the IPv6 Route Table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Route Table
.
The IPv6 Route Table displays.
6.
From the
Routes Displayed
menu, select one of the following options:
• All Routes
. Show all active IPv6 routes.
• Best Routes Only
. Show only the best active routes.
• Configured Routes Only
. Show only the manually configured routes.
7.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Update
button.
Configuring Routing
192
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 55. IPv6v Route Table information
Field
Number of Routes
IPv6 Prefix
Prefix Length
Protocol
Next Hop Interface
Next Hop IP Address
Preference
Description
The total number of active routes in the route table.
The network prefix for the active route.
The prefix length for the active route.
The type of protocol for the active route.
The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next hop would be a Null0 interface.
The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.
The route preference of the configured route.
Configure IPv6 Route Preferences
You can configure the default preference for each protocol. These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics. Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol, independent of any other protocol. The switch selects the route with the lowest preference value as the best route to a destination. When multiple routes to a destination exist, the preference values are used to determine the preferred route. If these preference values routes are equal, the route with the best route metric is chosen. To avoid problems with mismatched metrics, you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols.
Configure the IPv6 route preferences:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Route Preference
.
Configuring Routing
193
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The IPv6 Route Preference page displays.
6.
In the
Static
field, specify the static route preference value for the switch.
The range is 1 to 255. The default value is
1
.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The Local field displays the local preference.
Configure Routing VLANs
You can configure the switch software with some ports supporting VLANs and some supporting routing. You can also configure the software to allow traffic on a VLAN to be treated as if the VLAN were a router port.
When a port is enabled for bridging (default) rather than routing, all normal bridge processing is performed for an inbound packet, which is then associated with a VLAN. Its MAC
Destination Address (MAC DA) and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address table. If routing is enabled for the VLAN, and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is that of the internal bridge-router interface, the packet is routed. An inbound multicast packet is forwarded to all ports in the VLAN, plus the internal bridge-router interface, if it was received on a routed VLAN.
Since a port can be configured to belong to more than one VLAN, VLAN routing might be enabled for all of the VLANs on the port, or for a subset. VLAN Routing can be used to allow more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet. It could also be used when a
VLAN spans multiple physical networks, or when additional segmentation or security is required. This section shows how to configure switch software to support VLAN routing. A port can be either a VLAN port or a router port, but not both. However, a VLAN port can be part of a VLAN that is itself a router port.
Configure VLAN Routing With the VLAN Routing Wizard
The VLAN Routing Wizard creates a VLAN routing interface, configure the IP address and subnet mask for the interface, and add selected ports or LAGs to the VLAN. With this wizard, you can:
•
Create a VLAN.
•
Add selected ports to the newly created VLAN and remove selected ports from the default
VLAN.
•
Optionally, you can create a LAG, add selected ports to a LAG, then add the LAG to the newly created VLAN.
•
Enable tagging on selected ports if the port is in another VLAN. Disable tagging if a selected port does not exist in another VLAN.
•
Exclude ports not selected from the VLAN.
•
Enable routing on the VLAN using the IP address and subnet mask entered.
Configuring Routing
194
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To configure VLAN routing using the VLAN routing wizard:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the
NETGEAR Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > VLAN > VLAN Routing Wizard
.
6.
In the
Vlan ID
field, specify the VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with this VLAN. The VID is
1 to 4093 characters in length.
7.
In the
IP Address
field, define the IP address of the VLAN interface.
8.
In the
Network Mask
field, define the subnet mask of the VLAN interface.
9.
In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following modes or reset the port to the default settings:
• T (Tagged)
. Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.
The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.
Configuring Routing
195
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• U (Untagged)
. Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.
By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN.
10.
In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:
• T (Tagged)
. Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.
• U (Untagged)
. Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.
By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manually Manage Routing VLANs
You can view information about existing VLAN routing interfaces on the switch, change the settings for an existing routing VLAN, change a regular VLAN into a routing VLAN, and delete a routing VLAN.
View the Existing Routing VLANs and Manually Add a Routing VLAN
You can view the routing VLANs that you added through the VLAN Routing Wizard and manually add a routing VLAN. You do so by changing a regular VLAN that already exists on the switch into a routing VLAN.
To view the exiting routing VLANs or manually add a routing VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration
.
Configuring Routing
196
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays. The table displays any existing routing
VLANs.
6.
To add a routing VLAN by changing a regular VLAN into a routing VLAN, do the following:
a.
From the
VLAN
menu, select the VLAN that you want to configure for VLAN routing.
The
VLAN
menu display all IDs of the VLANs that are configured on the switch.
b.
In the
IP Address
field, enter an IP address for the VLAN routing interface.
c.
In the
Subnet Mask
field, enter a subnet mask for the VLAN routing interface.
d.
In the
IP MTU
field, specify the maximum size of IP packets sent on an interface.
A valid range is from 68 bytes to the link MTU. The default value is 1500. A value of 0 specifies that the value in the
IP MTU
must be ignored. In that situation, the VLAN interface uses the link MTU as the IP MTU. The link MTU is the maximum frame size minus the length of the layer 2 header.
e.
Click the
Add
button.
The VLAN becomes a routing VLAN.
The following table describes the VLAN routing interface status information on the page.
Table 56. VLAN routing interface information
Field
Port
MAC Address
Routing Mode
Description
The port number assigned to the VLAN Routing Interface.
The MAC Address assigned to the VLAN Routing Interface.
Shows whether the routing mode is enabled (Enable or Disable).
Change an Existing Routing VLAN
To change the settings for an existing routing VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Configuring Routing
197
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
Routing > VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration
.
The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays.
6.
From the VLAN list, select the VLAN.
7.
Change the settings as needed.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Remove a Routing VLAN
When you remove a routing VLAN, the VLAN becomes a regular VLAN.
To remove a routing VLAN:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration
.
The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays.
6.
From the VLAN list, select the VLAN.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The routing VLAN is removed and the VLAN becomes a regular VLAN.
Configure Router Discovery
The Router Discovery protocol is used by hosts to identify operational routers (or routing interfaces) on the subnet. Router discovery messages can be of two types: router advertisements and router solicitations. The protocol requires each router to periodically advertise the IP addresses that it is associated with. Hosts listen for these advertisements and discover the IP addresses of neighboring routers.
Configuring Routing
198
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To configure the router discovery parameters:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > Router Discovery
.
The Router Discovery Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box for the routing interface.
To configure all routing interfaces, select the check box in the heading row. To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface. The interface number displays in the Interface field in the table heading row.
7.
From the
Advertise Mode
menu, select
Enable
.
Router advertisements are transmitted from the selected interface.
8.
In the
Advertise Address
field. specify the IP address to be used to advertise the switch.
9.
In the
Maximum Advertise Interval
field, specify the maximum time (in seconds) allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface.
The default is 600 seconds.
10.
In the
Minimum Advertise Interval
field, specify the minimum time (in seconds) allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface.
The default is 450 seconds.
11.
In the
Advertise Lifetime
field, specify the value (in seconds) to be used as the lifetime field in router advertisements sent from the interface.
This is the maximum length of time that the advertised addresses are to be considered as valid router addresses by hosts. The default is 1800 seconds.
12.
In the
Preference Level
field, specify the preference level of the router as a default router relative to other routers on the same subnet.
Higher numbered addresses are preferred. The default is 0.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Configuring Routing
199
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Your settings are saved.
Configure Routes and View Routes
You can configure static and default routes and view the routes that the switch learned.
To configure a static or default route:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > Routing Table > Route Configuration
.
The Configure Routes page displays. The page also shows the Route Status section.
6.
From the
Route Type
menu, select one of the following types of routes:
• Static
. For a static route, you must specify all fields.
• DefaultRoute
. For a default route, you cannot specify the
Network Address
and
Subnet Mask
fields.
7.
For a static route only, in the
Network Address
field, specify the IP route prefix for the destination.
To create a route, a valid routing interface must exist, and the next hop IP Address must be on the same network as the routing interface.
8.
For a static route only, in the
Subnet Mask
field, specify the subnet mask.
Also referred to as the network mask, the mask indicates the portion of the IP address that identifies the attached network.
9.
In the
Next Hop IP Address
field, specify the next hop IP address.
This is the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path towards the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network. When creating a route, the next hop IP must be on the same network as the routing interface.
Valid next hop IP addresses are listed in the Route Status table.
Configuring Routing
200
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
10.
In the
Preference
field, specify the preference value for the route.
Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, you can control whether a static route is more preferred or less preferred. The preference also controls whether a static route is more preferred or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.
11.
As an option, in the
Description
field, specify a description to help identify the route.
12.
Click the
Add
button.
The route is added.
The Route Status table provides information about the static routes that you manually configured on the switch and the routes the switch learned dynamically.
Table 57. Routing table information
Field
Network Address
Subnet Mask
Protocol
Route Type
Next Hop Interface
Next Hop IP Address
Preference
Metric
Description
The IP route prefix for the destination.
Also referred to as the network mask, the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.
The protocol that created the route. The protocol can be Local or Static.
Based on the protocol, Connected, Static, or Dynamic.
The outgoing router interface that must be used when the switch forwards traffic to the destination.
The outgoing router IP address that must be used when the switch forwards traffic to the next router (if any) in the path towards the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.
A value from 1 to 255.
The administrative cost of the path to the destination.
Delete Routes
To delete one or more static routes:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Configuring Routing
201
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > Routing Table > Route Configuration
.
The Configure Routes page displays. The page also shows the Route Status section.
6.
Select the check box next to each route to remove.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The static route is deleted.
Configure ARP
The address resolution protocol (ARP) associates a layer 2 MAC address with a layer 3 IPv4 address. The switch support both dynamic and manual ARP configuration. With manual ARP configuration, you can statically add entries into the ARP table.
ARP is a required part of the Internet protocol (IP) and is used to translate an IP address to a media (MAC) address, defined by a local area network (LAN) such as an Ethernet network.
A device that must send an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination, or if the destination is not on the same subnet, of the next hop router. The device achieves this by broadcasting an ARP request packet, to which the intended recipient responds by sending an
ARP unicast reply that contains its MAC address. Once learned, the MAC address is used in the destination address field of the Layer 2 header prepended to the IP packet.
The ARP cache is a table maintained locally in each device on the network. ARP cache entries are learned by examining the source information in the ARP packet payload fields, regardless of whether it is an ARP request or response. In this way, when an ARP request is broadcast to all stations on a LAN segment or virtual LAN (VLAN), each recipient can store the sender’s IP address and MAC address in its ARP cache. The ARP response, which is a unicast reply, is normally detected only by the device that sends the ARP request. That device stores the sender’s information in its ARP cache. Newer information always replaces existing content in the ARP cache.
If you move a device in the network, the device’s MAC address can become associated with another IP address. Or if you reconfigure, disconnect, or power off the device, the device’s IP address can disappear from the network altogether. To prevent such situations from causing information in the ARP cache to become outdated, each device on the network periodically updates the entries in its ARP cache with new information from the network. On the switch, you can set the ageout interval for ARP entries from 15 to 21600 seconds. When the ageout interval is reached, ARP entries for which the switch did not receive an ARP reply are removed form the switch ARP cache.
The switch supports 512 ARP entries, which include dynamic and static ARP entries.
To configure and display ARP details, see the following sections:
Configuring Routing
202
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
•
•
Configure the Global ARP Settings
•
Remove ARP Entries From the ARP Cache
View Entries in the ARP Cache
You can view entries in the ARP table.
To display entries in the ARP table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > ARP > Basic > ARP Cache
.
The Management VLAN ARP Cache page displays. The page also shows the Routing
VLANs ARP Cache section.
The following table provides information included in the management VLAN ARP cache section.
Table 58. ARP cache information
Field
IP Address
Port
MAC Address
Description
The associated IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch’s existing routing interfaces.
The associated interface of the connection.
The MAC address of the device.
Configuring Routing
203
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table provides information included in the routing VLANs ARP cache section.
Table 59. ARP cache information for routing VLANs
Field
IP Address
Interface
MAC Address
Type
Age
Description
The associated IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's existing routing interfaces.
The routing interface associated with the ARP entry.
The unicast MAC address of the device.
The type of the ARP entry. Possible values are:
• Local.
An ARP entry associated with one of the switch’s routing interface’s MAC addresses.
• Gateway.
A dynamic ARP entry for which the IP address is that of a router.
• Static.
An ARP entry configured by the user.
• Dynamic.
An ARP entry which was learned by the switch
Age since the entry was last refreshed in the ARP Table. The format is hh:mm:ss.
Create a Static ARP Entry
You can add a static entry to the ARP table.
To add an entry to the ARP table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > ARP > Advanced > ARP Create
.
The Static ARP Configuration page displays. The page also shows the Routing VLANs
ARP Cache section.
6.
In the IP Address field, specify the IP address to add.
Configuring Routing
204
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The address must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch’s existing routing interfaces.
7.
In the MAC Address field, specify the unicast MAC address of the device.
The format is six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example
00:06:29:32:81:40.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The entry is added to the table.
For information about the information in the Routing VLANs ARP Cache table, see
Table 59,
ARP cache information for routing VLANs
on page 204.
Configure the Global ARP Settings
You can display and change the configuration settings for the ARP table.
To display or change the setting for the ARP table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > ARP > Advanced > Global ARP Configuration
.
The Global ARP Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
Age Time
field, specify the number of seconds for an ARP entry to age out.
7.
In the
Response Time
field, specify the number of seconds that the switch must wait for a response to an ARP request.
8.
In the
Retries
field, specify the maximum number of times that the switch retries an ARP request.
9.
In the
Cache Size
field, specify the maximum number of entries for the ARP cache.
10.
Next to Dynamic Renew, select
Enable
to allow the ARP component to automatically attempt to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Configuring Routing
205
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Your settings are saved.
Remove ARP Entries From the ARP Cache
You can remove certain types of entries from the ARP table.
To remove entries from the ARP table:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > ARP > Advanced > ARP Entry Management
.
The ARP Entry Management page displays.
6.
From the
Remove From Table
menu, select the type of ARP entry to be removed.
• All Dynamic Entries
• All Dynamic and Gateway Entries
• Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry
• Specific Static Entry
• None
. This is the default selection.
7.
If you select
Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry
or
Specific Static Entry
from the
Remove
From Table
menu, enter the IP address of the entry that must be removed from the ARP table.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configuring Routing
206
5.
Configure Quality of Service
5
In a switch, each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the attached network. Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain packets over others based on user-defined criteria. When a packet is queued for transmission in a port, the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is configured and possibly the amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port. If a delay is necessary, packets get held in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for transmission. As queues become full, packets can no longer be held for transmission and are dropped by the switch.
Quality of Service (QoS) is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by distinguishing packets with strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay.
Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable network.
With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS capable. The presence of at least one node that is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path, and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised.
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
•
Manage Differentiated Services
207
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Manage Class of Service
The Class of Service (CoS) queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of switch queueing. This provides the desired QoS behavior for different types of network traffic when the complexities of DiffServ are not required. The priority of a packet arriving at an interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a mapping table. CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping, such as minimum guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping, are user configurable at the queue (or port) level.
Eight queues per port are supported.
Overview of CoS Configuration
You can set the Class of Service trust mode for an interface. Each port in the switch can be configured to trust one of the packet fields (802.1p or IP DSCP), or to not trust any packet’s priority designation (untrusted mode). If the port is set to a trusted mode, it uses a mapping table appropriate for the trusted field being used. This mapping table indicates the CoS queue to which the packet must be forwarded on the appropriate egress port. Of course, the trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of any use. If this is not the case, default actions are performed. These actions involve directing the packet to a specific
CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole, based on the existing port default priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802.1p mapping table.
Alternatively, when a port is configured as untrusted, it does not trust any incoming packet priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead. All packets arriving at the ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress ports, in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This process is also used for cases where a trusted port mapping cannot be honored, such as when a non-IP packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value.
Configure Global CoS Settings
To configure CoS trust mode settings on all interfaces:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure Quality of Service
208
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS
> CoS > Basic > CoS Configuration
.
6.
Either configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS-configurable interfaces or configure CoS settings per interface.
The default is Global.
•
To configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS configurable interfaces, do the following:
a.
Select the
Global
radio button.
b.
From the
Global Trust Mode
menu, select one of the following trust mode options for ingress traffic on the switch:
Untrusted
. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.
802.1p
. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.
The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.
DSCP
. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.
•
To configure CoS settings per interface, do the following:
a.
Select the
Interface
radio button.
b.
From the
Interface Trust Mode
menu, select one of the following trust mode options:
Untrusted
. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.
802.1p
. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.
The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.
DSCP
. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Quality of Service
209
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface
You can configure the trust mode for one or more interfaces and apply an interface shaping rate to all interfaces or to a specific interface.
To configure CoS settings for an interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
5.
Select
QoS > CoS > Advanced > CoS Interface Configuration.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
Configure Quality of Service
210
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Interface Trust Mode
menu, select one of the following trust mode options for ingress traffic on the selected interfaces:
• Untrusted
. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.
• 802.1p
. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. The
QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven internal hardware priority queues. The default value is 802.1p.
• DSCP
. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.
9.
In the
Interface Shaping Rate
field, specify the maximum allowed bandwidth.
The maximum allowed bandwidth is typically used to shape the outbound transmission rate. This value is controlled independently of any per-queue maximum bandwidth configuration. It is effectively a second-level shaping mechanism. The default value is 0, which means that the maximum is unlimited. You can enter values from 0 to 100 in increments of 1.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface
You can define what a particular queue does by configuring switch egress queues.
User-configurable parameters control the amount of bandwidth used by the queue, the queue depth during times of congestion, and the scheduling of packet transmission from the set of all queues on a port. Each port contains its own CoS queue-related configuration.
The configuration process is simplified by allowing each CoS queue parameter to be configured globally or per port. A global configuration change is automatically applied to all ports in the system.
To configure CoS queue settings for an interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure Quality of Service
211
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > CoS > Advanced > Interface Queue Configuration
.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Queue ID
menu, select the queue to be configured.
9.
In the
Minimum Bandwidth
field, specify the minimum guaranteed bandwidth allotted to the queue.
Setting this value higher than its corresponding maximum bandwidth automatically increases the maximum to the same value. The default value is 0. The valid range is 0 to
100 in increments of 1. The value 0 means no guaranteed minimum. The sum of the individual minimum bandwidth values for all queues for the interface cannot exceed the defined maximum (100).
10.
From the
Scheduler Type
menu, select one of the following options:
• Strict
. The interface services traffic with the highest priority on a queue first.
• Weighted
. The interface uses weighted round robin to associate a weight to each queue. This is the default setting.
The Queue Management Type field displays the queue depth management technique that is used for queues on the interface. By default, this method is Taildrop, irrespective of your selection from the
Scheduler Type
menu.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Quality of Service
212
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Map 802.1p Priorities to Queues
You can view or change which internal traffic classes are mapped to the 802.1p priority class values in Ethernet frames that the device receives. The priority-to-traffic class mappings can be applied globally or per interface. The mapping allows the switch to group various traffic types (for example, data or voice) based on their latency requirements and give preference to time-sensitive traffic.
To map 802.1p priorities to queues:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > CoS > Advanced > 802.1p to Queue Mapping
.
6.
Select the
Global
radio button to specify all interfaces (that can be configured for CoS) or select the
Interface
radio button to select individual interfaces.
7.
In the 802.1p to Queue Mapping table, map each of the eight 802.1p priorities to a queue
(internal traffic class).
The 802.1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802.1p priorities to be mapped. The priority goes from low (0) to high (7). For example, traffic with a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort. Traffic with a higher priority, such as 7, might be time-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video.
Configure Quality of Service
213
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The values in the menu under each priority represent the traffic class. The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to be sent.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Map DSCP Values to Queues
You can map an internal traffic class to a DSCP value.
To map DSCP values to queues:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > CoS > Advanced > DSCP to Queue Mapping
.
6.
For each DSCP value, select from the corresponding
Queue
menu which internal traffic class must be mapped to the DSCP value.
Configure Quality of Service
214
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to be sent.
The allowed Per Hop Behavior (PHBs) values, apart from other DSCP experimental values, are as follows:
• Class Selector (CS) PHB
. These values are based on IP precedence.
• Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB
. These values define four main levels to sort and manipulate some flows within the network.
• Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB
. These values are used to prioritize traffic for real-time applications. In many situations, if the network exceeded traffic and you need some bandwidth guaranteed for an application, the EF traffic must receive this rate independently of the intensity of any other traffic attempting to transit the node.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Differentiated Services
The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services (DiffServ) support that allows traffic to be classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per-hop behaviors.
Standard IP-based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service. Best effort service implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although it is not guaranteed. During times of congestion, packets might be delayed, sent sporadically, or dropped. For typical Internet applications, such as email and file transfer, a slight degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. Conversely, any degradation of service can negatively affect applications with strict timing requirements, such as voice or multimedia.
Overview of Defining DiffServ
To use DiffServ for QoS, you must first define the following categories and their criteria:
1. Class
. Create classes and define class criteria.
2. Policy
. Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.
3. Service
. Add a policy to an inbound interface.
Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria are defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy’s attributes. Policy attributes can be defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken depend on which class matches the packet.
Packet processing begins by testing the class match criteria for a packet. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.
Configure Quality of Service
215
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure DiffServ Settings
Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria. The filtering criteria is defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes can be defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs.
The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class. Then one or more classes are added to a policy. Policies are then added to interfaces.
Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet. The
All
class type option specifies that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class. The
Any
class type option specifies that at least one match criteria must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class. Classes are tested in the order in which they were added to the policy. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.
Configure the Global DiffServ Mode
You can display DiffServ general status group information, which includes the current administrative mode setting as well as the current and maximum number of rows in each of the main DiffServ private MIB tables.
To configure the global DiffServ mode:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > DiffServ Configuration
.
Configure Quality of Service
216
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
Select the administrative mode for DiffServ:
• Enable
. Differentiated services are active. This is the default setting.
• Disable
. The DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed but is not active.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the information displayed in the Status table on the DiffServ
Configuration page.
Table 60. DiffServ Status information
Field
Class Table
Class Rule table
Policy table
Policy Instance table
Policy Attributes table
Service table
Description
The number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured policy attributes (attached to the policy class instances) out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured services (attached to the policies on specified interfaces) out of the total allowed on the switch.
Configure a DiffServ Class
You can add a new DiffServ class name, or rename or delete an existing class. You can also define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class. As packets are received, these DiffServ classes are used to prioritize packets. You can set up multiple match criteria in a class. The logic is a Boolean logical AND for this criteria. After creating a class, click the class link to the
Class page.
Configure Quality of Service
217
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Create and Configure a DiffServ Class
To create and configure a DiffServ class:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration
.
6.
In the
Class Name
field, enter a class name.
The
Class Name
field also lists all the existing DiffServ class names, from which you can select one for modification or deletion. The class name can be 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters in length.
7.
From the
Class Type
menu, select the class type.
The switch supports only the class type value
All
, which means that all the various match criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match.
All
signifies the logical AND statement of all the match criteria. You can select the class type only when you are creating a new class. After the class is created, the
Class Type
field becomes nonconfigurable.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The new class is added.
9.
After creating the class, click the class name.
The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class configuration.
Configure Quality of Service
218
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
10.
Define the criteria that must be associated the DiffServ class:
• Match Every
. Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the
Match Every
menu is
Any
.
• Reference Class
. Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After you select the radio button, the classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to reference. A class can reference at most one other class of the same type.
• Class of Service
. Select this radio button to require the Class of Service (CoS) value in an Ethernet frame header to match the specified CoS value. This option lists all the values for the Class of Service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which one can be selected.
• VLAN
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s VLAN ID to match a VLAN ID or a
VLAN ID within a continuous range. If you configure a range, a match occurs if a packet’s VLAN ID is the same as any VLAN ID within the range. The VLAN value is in the range of 1–4093.
• Ethernet Type
. Select this radio button to require the EtherType value in the Ethernet frame header to match the specified EtherType value. After you select the radio button, specify the EtherType keyword from the list of common protocols that are mapped to their Ethertype value.
Configure Quality of Service
219
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Source MAC
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source MAC address to match the specified MAC address. After you select this radio button, use the following fields to configure the source MAC address match criteria:
Address
. The source MAC address to match. The source MAC address is specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.
Mask
. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the source MAC address to compare against the Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard mask, which ACLs use.
• Destination MAC
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination MAC address to match the specified MAC address. After you select the radio button, use the following fields to configure the destination MAC address match criteria:
Address
. The destination MAC address to match. The destination MAC address is specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.
Mask
. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the destination MAC address to compare against an Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard mask, which ACLs use.
• Protocol Type
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes
Other
as a selection, which lets you enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.
• Source IP
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source IP address to match the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following fields to configure the source IP address match criteria:
Address
. The source IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.
Mask
. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the source IP address to use for matching against packet content.
• Source L4 Port
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The range is 0 to
65535. The menu includes
Other
as an option for unnamed ports.
• Destination IP
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination IP address to match the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following fields to configure the destination IP address match criteria:
Address
. The destination IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.
Mask
. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the destination IP address to use for matching against packet content.
Configure Quality of Service
220
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Destination L4 Port
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP destination port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The range is 0 to 65535. The menu includes
Other
as an option for unnamed ports.
• IP DSCP
. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point
(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes
Other
as a selection, which lets you enter an IP
DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the
Service Type octet in the IP header.
• Precedence Value
. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP precedence value to match the specified number from 0 to 7, which you must select from the menu. The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order 3 bits of the
Service Type octet in the IP header.
• IP ToS
. Select this radio button to require the packet’s Type of Service (ToS) bits in the IP header to match the specified value. The IP ToS field in a packet is defined as all 8 bits of the service type octet in the IP header. After you select the radio button, use the following fields to configure the ToS match criteria:
Bits Value
. Enter a two-digit hexadecimal number octet value in the range from 00 to ff to match the bits in a packet’s ToS field.
Bit Mask
. Specify the bit positions that are used for comparison against the IP ToS field in a packet.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Class
Summary section at the bottom of the DiffServ Advanced Class Configuration page.
Table 61. DiffServ Class Configuration, Class Summary information
Field
Match Criteria
Values
Description
The configured match criteria for the specified class.
The values of the configured match criteria.
Rename an Existing DiffServ Class
To rename an existing DiffServ class:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Configure Quality of Service
221
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration
.
The Class Name page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the class name.
7.
In the
Class Name
field, specify the new name.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Change the Criteria for an Existing DiffServ Class
To change the criteria for an existing DiffServ class:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration
.
The Class Name page displays.
6.
Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.
The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.
7.
Change the class configuration as needed.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Quality of Service
222
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Delete a DiffServ Class
To delete a DiffServ class:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration
.
The Class Name page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the class name.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The class is removed.
Configure DiffServ IPv6 Class Settings
The IPv6 class configuration feature extends the existing QoS ACL and DiffServ functionality by providing support for IPv6 packet classification. An Ethernet IPv6 packet is distinguished from an IPv4 packet by its unique Ethertype value, so all IPv6 classifiers include the
Ethertype field. An IPv6 access list serves the same purpose as its IPv4 counterpart.
Before the introduction of the IPv6 class feature, any DiffServ class definition was assumed to apply to an IPv4 packet. That is, any match item in a class rule was interpreted in the context of an IPv4 header. An example is a class rule that specifies an L4 port match value.
With the introduction of the IPv6 match capability, you must specify if this class rule is for IPv4 or for IPv6 packets. To facilitate this distinction, a class configuration parameter is added to specify whether a class applies to IPv4 or IPv6 packet streams.
The destination and source IPv6 addresses use a prefix length value instead of an individual mask to qualify them as a subnet addresses or a host addresses. The flow label is a 20-bit number that is unique to an IPv6 packet, used by end stations to signify some form of Quality of Service (QoS) handling in routers.
Packets that match an IPv6 classifier are allowed to be marked using only the 802.1p (CoS) field or the IP DSCP field in the traffic Class octet. IP precedence is not defined for IPv6. This is not an appropriate type of packet marking.
Configure Quality of Service
223
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
IPv6 ACL/DiffServ assignment is appropriate for LAG interfaces. The procedures described by an ACL or DiffServ policy are equally applicable on a LAG interface.
Create and Configure an IPv6 DiffServ Class
To create and configure an IPv6 DiffServ class:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration
.
6.
Enter a class name in the
Class Name
field.
The
Class Name
field also lists all the existing IPv6 class names, from which one can be selected for modification or deletion.
7.
From the
Class Type
menu, select the class type.
The switch supports only the class type value
All
, which means that all the various match criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match.
All
signifies the logical AND statement of all the match criteria. You can select the class type only when you are creating a new class. After the class is created, the
Class Type
field becomes nonconfigurable.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The new class is added.
9.
After creating the class, click the class name.
Configure Quality of Service
224
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class configuration.
10.
Define the criteria that must be associated the IPv6 DiffServ class:
• Match Every
. Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the
Match Every
menu is
Any
.
• Reference Class
. Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After selecting this option, the classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to reference. A class can reference at most one other class of the same type.
• Protocol Type
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes
Other
as a selection, which lets you enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.
• Source Prefix/Length
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source prefix and prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length. Prefix must always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the hexadecimal range from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and the prefix length can be in the range from 0 to 128.
• Source L4 Port
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The range is 0 to
65535. The menu includes
Other
as an option for unnamed ports.
• Destination Prefix/Length
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination prefix and prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length.
Prefix must always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the
Configure Quality of Service
225
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
hexadecimal range from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and the prefix length can be in the range from 0 to 128.
• Destination L4 Port
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP destination port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu.
The range is 0 to 65535. The menu includes
Other
as an option for unnamed ports.
• Flow Label
. Select this radio button to require a packet’s flow label to match the specified flow label. The flow label is a 20-bit number that is unique to an IPv6 packet and that is used by end stations to signify QoS handling in routers. The flow label can be specified in the range from 0 to 1048575.
• IP DSCP
. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point
(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes
Other
as a selection, which lets you enter an IP
DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the
Service Type octet in the IP header.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed in the Class
Summary section.
Table 62. IPv6 DiffServ class configuration class summary
Field
Match Criteria
Values
Description
The configured match criteria for the specified class.
The values of the configured match criteria.
Rename an Existing IPv6 DiffServ Class
To rename an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Configure Quality of Service
226
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration
.
The Class Name page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the class name.
7.
In the
Class Name
field, specify the new name.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Change the Criteria for an Existing IPv6 DiffServ Class
To change the criteria for an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration
.
The Class Name page displays.
6.
Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.
The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.
7.
Change the class configuration as needed.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete an IPv6 DiffServ Class
To delete an IPv6 DiffServ class:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
Configure Quality of Service
227
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration
.
The Class Name page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the class name.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The class is removed.
Configure a DiffServ Policy
You can associate a collection of classes with one or more policies.
Create and Configure a DiffServ Policy
To create and configure a DiffServ policy:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration
.
Configure Quality of Service
228
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
Enter a policy name in the
Policy Name
field.
You cannot specify the policy type. By default, the policy type is In, indicating that the policy applies to ingress packets.
7.
From the
Member Class
menu, optionally select an existing class that you want to associate with the new policy.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The new policy is added.
9.
After creating the policy, click the policy name.
The policy name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the policy attributes.
10.
From the
Assign Queue
menu, select the queue to which packets of this policy class must be assigned.
This is an integer value in the range 0 to 7.
Configure Quality of Service
229
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
11.
Configure the policy attributes:
• Drop
. Select this radio button to require each inbound packet to be dropped.
• Mark VLAN CoS
. Select this radio button to specify the VLAN priority, which you must select from the menu. The VLAN priority is expressed as an integer value in the range from 0 to 7.
• Mark IP Precedence
. Select this radio button to require packets to be marked with an
IP precedence value before being forwarded. You must select an IP precedence value from 0 to 7 from the menu.
• Mirror
. Select this radio button to require packets to be mirrored to an interface or
LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.
• Redirect
. Select this radio button to require packets to be redirected to an interface or
LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.
• Mark IP DSCP
. Select this radio button to require packet to be marked with an IP
DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes
Other
as a selection, which lets you enter an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.
• Simple Policy
. Select this radio button to define the traffic policing style for the class.
A simple policy uses a single data rate and burst size, resulting in one of two outcomes: conform or violate. You must define the policy as described in the next step.
12.
If you select the
Simple Policy
radio button, you can specify the traffic policing style for the class:
• Color Mode
. From the menu, select one of the following options:
Color Blind
. This is the default selection. Color classes do not apply.
Color Aware
. Requires you to select a color class that is valid for use with this policy instance. After you select
Color Aware
from the
Color Mode
menu, the
Color Conform Class
menu displays. From this menu you must select a color class that you already created (see
selected as a member class for this policy instance (see
Note:
A valid color class contains a single, non-excluded match criterion for the CoS, IP DSCP, or IP Precedence option. The configured option must not conflict with the classifier of the policy instance itself.
• Committed Rate
. Enter the committed rate that is applied to conforming packets by specifying a value in the range from 1 to 4294967295 Kbps.
• Committed Burst Size
. Enter the committed burst size that is applied to conforming packets by specifying a value in the range from 1 to 128 Kbps.
13.
Select the conforming and violating actions.
The Conform Action section and Violate Action section list the actions to be taken on conforming packets according to the policing metrics. By default, both conforming packets and violating packets are sent.
Configure Quality of Service
230
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
In both the Conform Action section and the Violate Action section, select one of the following actions:
• Send
. Packets are forwarded unmodified. This is the default confirming action and the default violating action.
• Drop
. Packets are dropped.
• Mark CoS
. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value before being forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark CoS field is set. You must select a
CoS value from 0 to 7 from the menu.
• Mark IP Precedence
. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified IP
Precedence value before being forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark IP
Precedence field is set. You must select an IP precedence value from 0 to 7 from the menu.
• Mark IP DSCP
. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value before being forwarded. This selection requires that the DSCP field is set. You must select a
DSCP code from the menu. The menu includes
Other
as a selection, which lets you enter an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.
14.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 63. DiffServ policy configuration policy attribute
Field
Policy Name
Policy Type
Member Class Name
Description
The name of the DiffServ policy.
The type of the policy, which is always inbound (In).
The name of the class instance within the policy.
Rename an Existing DiffServ Policy
To rename an existing DiffServ policy:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure Quality of Service
231
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration
.
The Policy Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the policy name.
7.
In the
Policy Name
field, specify the new name.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Change the Policy Attributes for an Existing DiffServ Policy
To change the policy attributes for an existing DiffServ policy:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration
.
The Policy Configuration page displays.
6.
Click the policy name, which is a hyperlink.
The page on which you can change the policy attributes displays.
7.
Change the policy attributes as needed.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Quality of Service
232
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Remove a Class From an Existing DiffServ Policy
To remove a class from an existing DiffServ policy:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration
.
The Policy Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the policy name.
7.
From the
Member Class
menu, select
None
.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
The class is removed from the policy.
Delete a DiffServ Policy
To delete a DiffServ policy:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Configure Quality of Service
233
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration
.
The Policy Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the policy name.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The policy is removed.
Configure the DiffServ Service Interface
You can activate a policy on an interface.
Attach a DiffServ Policy to an Interface
To attach a DiffServ policy to an interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration
.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
Configure Quality of Service
234
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Policy Name
menu, select a policy name.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 64. Service Interface Configuration information
Field
Direction
Operational Status
Description
Shows the traffic direction of this service interface (either In or Out).
Shows the operational status of this service interface (either Up or Down).
Configure Quality of Service
235
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Remove a DiffServ Policy From an Interface
To remove a DiffServ policy from an interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration
.
The Service Interface Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check boxes that are associated with the interfaces from which you want to remove the policy.
7.
From the
Policy In Name
menu, select
None
.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
View DiffServ Service Statistics
You can display service-level statistical information about all interfaces to which DiffServ policies are attached.
To view the DiffServ service statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Configure Quality of Service
236
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Statistics
.
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page.
Table 65. DiffServ Service Statistics information
Field
Interface
Description
All valid port numbers on the switch with a DiffServ policy that is attached in the inbound direction.
Direction The traffic direction of interface is inbound (In). This field shows only the direction for which a DiffServ policy is attached.
The name of the policy that is currently attached to the specified interface and direction.
Policy Name
Operational Status The operational status of the policy that is attached to the specified interface and direction. The value is either Up or Down.
Discarded Packets The total number of packets that are discarded for all class instances in this service policy for any reason due to DiffServ treatment. This is the overall count per interface, per direction. The discarded packets are supported in the inbound direction but not in the outbound direction.
Member Classes All DiffServ classes that are defined as members of the selected policy name. Select a member class name to display its statistics. If no class is associated with the selected policy, then the list is empty.
Configure Quality of Service
237
6.
Manage Device Security
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
Configure Access Control Lists
6
238
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Management Security Settings
You can configure the login password, Remote Authorization Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) settings, Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS) settings, and authentication lists.
Change the Password
You can change the login password.
To change the login password for the management interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security
> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password
.
The Change Password page displays.
6.
In the
Old Password
field, specify the current password for the account created by the user.
The entered password is displayed in dots. Passwords are up to 20 alphanumeric characters in length, and are case sensitive.
7.
In the
New Password
field, specify the optional new or changed password for the account.
The entered password is displayed in dots. Passwords are up to 20 alphanumeric characters in length, and are case sensitive.
8.
In the
Confirm Password
field, enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly.
The entered password is displayed in dots.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
239
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Reset the Password to the Default Password
You can reset the password to the default password, which is
password
.
If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you change the management mode back to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal, all
Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last configuration saved on the cloud server, including the switch password (that is, the password is reset to the Insight network password).
If you changed the password through the local browser interface and you forget the password and are unable to log in to switch, press the multifunctional
Reset
button on the back panel of the switch for more than five seconds. The device reboots, and all switch settings, including the password, are reset to the factory default values.
To reset the password to the default password:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security
> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password
.
The Change Password page displays.
6.
Select the
Reset Password
check box.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
240
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
RADIUS Overview
RADIUS servers provide additional security for networks. The RADIUS server maintains a user database, which contains per-user authentication information. The switch passes information to the configured RADIUS server, which can authenticate a user name and password before authorizing use of the network. RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for the following:
•
Web access
•
Access control port (802.1X)
Configure the Global RADIUS Server Settings
Use the Global Configuration page to add information about one or more RADIUS servers on the network.
Consider the maximum delay time when you are configuring RADIUS maximum retransmit and RADIUS time-out values. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the maximum retransmit period on each server runs out before the next server is attempted. A retransmit does not occur until the configured time-out period on that server passes without a response from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving a response from the
RADIUS application equals the retransmit time x time-out period for all configured servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt, all user interfaces are blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response.
To configure the global RADIUS server settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Global Configuration
.
The RADIUS Configuration page displays.
The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured (see
RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch
on page 243). The switch supports up to
three RADIUS servers. If more than one RADIUS server is configured, the current server
Manage Device Security
241
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
is the server configured as the primary server. If no servers are configured as the primary server, the current server is the most recently added RADIUS server.
6.
In the
Max Number of Retransmits
field, specify the maximum number of times a request packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server.
The valid range is from 1 to 15. The default value is 4.
Consider the maximum delay time when you are configuring RADIUS maximum retransmit and RADIUS time-out values. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the maximum retransmit period on each server runs out before the next server is attempted.
A retransmit does not occur until the configured time-out period on that server passes without a response from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving a response from the RADIUS application equals the retransmit time x time-out period for all configured servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt, all user interfaces are blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response.
7.
In the
Timeout Duration
field, specify the time-out value, in seconds, for request retransmissions.
The valid range is from 1 to 30. The default value is 5.
Consider the maximum delay time when you are configuring RADIUS maximum retransmit and RADIUS time-out values. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the maximum retransmit period on each server runs out before the next server is attempted.
A retransmit does not occur until the configured time-out period on that server passes without a response from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving a response from the RADIUS application equals the retransmit time x time-out period for all configured servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt, all user interfaces are blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response.
8.
From he
Accounting Mode
menu, select to disable or enable RADIUS accounting on the server.
The default is Disabled.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields displayed on the page.
Table 66. RADIUS Configuration information
Field
Current Server Address
Number of Configured
Authentication Servers
Description
The address of the current server. This field is blank if no servers are configured.
The number of configured authentication RADIUS servers. The value can range from 0 to 32.
Manage Device Security
242
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch
Use the RADIUS Server Configuration page to view and configure various settings for a
RADIUS server configured on the switch.
Add a Primary RADIUS Authentication Server to the Switch
To add a primary RADIUS authentication server to the switch and view the RADIUS authentication server statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration
.
The Server Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
Server Address
field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.
7.
In the
Authentication Port
field, specify the UDP port number the server uses to verify the
RADIUS server authentication.
The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 1812.
8.
From the
Secret Configured
menu, select
Yes
.
You must select
Yes
before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the
RADIUS server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server was configured.
9.
In the
Secret
field, type the shared secret text string used for authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS server.
This secret must match the RADIUS encryption.
10.
From the
Active
menu, select
Primary
.
11.
From the
Message Authenticator
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
to specify whether the message authenticator attribute for the selected server is enabled.
Manage Device Security
243
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The message authenticator adds protection to RADIUS messages by using an MD5 hash to encrypt each message. The shared secret is used as the key, and if the message fails to be verified by the RADIUS server, it is discarded.
12.
Click the
Add
button.
The server is added to the switch.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
14.
To reset the authentication server and RADIUS statistics to their default values, click the
Clear Counters
button.
The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics displayed on the page.
Table 67. RADIUS authentication server statistics information
Field
Server Address
Description
The address of the RADIUS server or the name of the RADIUS server for which the statistics are displayed.
Round Trip Time
Access Requests
The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most recent access-reply/access-challenge and the access-request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server.
The number of RADIUS access-request packets sent to this server. This number does not include retransmissions.
The number of RADIUS access-request packets retransmitted to this server.
Access Retransmissions
Access Accepts
Access Rejects
Timeouts
The number of RADIUS access-accept packets, including both valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server.
The number of RADIUS access-reject packets, including both valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server.
Access Challenges
Malformed Access Responses The number of malformed RADIUS access-response packets received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included in malformed access-responses.
Bad Authenticators
The number of RADIUS access-challenge packets, including both valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server.
The number of RADIUS access-response packets containing invalid authenticators or signature attributes received from this server.
Pending Requests The number of RADIUS access-request packets destined for this server that did not yet time out or receive a response.
The number of authentication time-outs to this server.
Manage Device Security
244
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 67. RADIUS authentication server statistics information (continued)
Field
Unknown Types
Packets Dropped
Description
The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type that were received from this server on the authentication port.
The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason.
Modify the Settings for a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch
To modify the settings for a RADIUS authentication server on the switch:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration
.
The Server Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the server IP address.
7.
Modify the configuration for the selected server.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Remove a RADIUS Authentication Server From the Switch
To a remove a RADIUS authentication server from the switch:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Manage Device Security
245
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration
.
The Server Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the IP address of the server to remove.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The RADIUS server is removed.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a RADIUS Accounting Server
Use the Accounting Server Configuration page to view and configure various settings for a
RADIUS accounting servers on the network.
Add a RADIUS Accounting Server to the Switch
To add a RADIUS accounting server to the switch and view the RADIUS accounting server statistics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration
.
Manage Device Security
246
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
Accounting Server Address
field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS accounting server to add.
7.
In the
Port
field, specify the UDP port number the server uses to verify the RADIUS accounting server authentication. The default UDP port number is 1813.
8.
From the
Secret Configured
menu, select
Yes
to add a RADIUS secret in the next field.
You must select
Yes
before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the
RADIUS accounting server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server was configured.
9.
In the
Secret
field, type the shared secret to use with the specified accounting server.
10.
From the
Accounting Mode
menu, select
Enable
to enable the RADIUS accounting mode.
11.
Click the
Add
button.
The server is added to the switch.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics displayed on the page.
13.
To reset the accounting server and RADIUS statistics to their default values, click the
Clear
Counters
button.
Table 68. RADIUS accounting server statistics information
Field
Accounting Server Address
Round Trip Time (secs)
Description
The accounting server associated with the statistics.
The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most recent accounting-response and the accounting-request that matched it from this
RADIUS accounting server.
Accounting Requests
Accounting Retransmissions
Accounting Responses
The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets sent not including retransmissions.
The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets retransmitted to this
RADIUS accounting server.
The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server.
Malformed Accounting Responses The number of malformed RADIUS accounting-response packets received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length.
Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses.
Bad Authenticators
Pending Requests
The number of RADIUS accounting-response packets that contained invalid authenticators received from this accounting server.
The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets sent to this server that did not yet time out or receive a response.
Manage Device Security
247
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Table 68. RADIUS accounting server statistics information (continued)
Field
Timeouts
Unknown Types
Packets Dropped
Description
The number of accounting time-outs to this server.
The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type that were received from this server on the accounting port.
The number of RADIUS packets that were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason.
Manage Device Security
248
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Modify the Settings for a RADIUS Accounting Server on the Switch
To modify the settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the switch:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration
.
The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the server IP address.
7.
Modify the configuration for the selected accounting server.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Remove a RADIUS Accounting Server From the Switch
To a remove a RADIUS accounting server from the switch:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Manage Device Security
249
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration
.
The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the IP address of the server to remove.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The RADIUS accounting server is removed.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure TACACS+
TACACS+ provides a centralized user management system, while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes. TACACS+ provides the following services:
• Authentication
.
Provides authentication during login and through user names and user-defined passwords.
• Authorization
.
Performed at login. When the authentication session is completed, an authorization session starts using the authenticated user name. The TACACS+ server checks the user privileges.
The TACACS+ protocol ensures network security through encrypted protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS+ server.
Configure the Global TACACS+ Settings
You can configure the TACACS+ settings for communication between the switch and the
TACACS+ server that you set up.
To configure the global TACACS+ settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > TACACS+ > TACACS+ Configuration
.
Manage Device Security
250
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The TACACS+ Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
Key String
field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+ communications between the switch and the TACACS+ server.
The valid range is 0–128. The key must match the key configured on the TACACS+ server.
7.
In the
Connection Timeout
field, specify the maximum number of seconds allowed to establish a TCP connection between the switch and the TACACS+ server.
The valid range is 1–30 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a TACACS+ Server on the Switch
Use the TACACS+ Server Configuration page to configure up to five TACACS+ servers with which the switch can communicate.
To configure a TACACS+ server on the switch:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration
.
The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
TACACS+ Server
field, enter the TACACS+ server IP address.
7.
In the
Priority
field, specify the priority for the TACACS+ server.
The priority determines the order in which the TACACS+ servers are contacted when attempting to authenticate a user. A value of 0 is the highest priority. The valid range is
0–65535.
8.
In the
Port
field, specify the authentication port value for TACAS+ server sessions. It must be within the range 0–65535. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses the standard
TCP port 49 for sessions with the server.
Manage Device Security
251
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
9.
In the
Key String
field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+ communications between the device and the TACACS+ server.
The valid range is 0–128. The key must match the key used on the TACACS+ server.
10.
In the
Connection Timeout
field, specify the time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS+ server times out.
The range is 1–30. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses a default value of 5.
11.
Click the
Add
button.
The server is added to the switch.
Configure Authentication Lists
You can configure a default login list that specifies one or more authentication methods to validate switch or port access for the admin user.
Note:
The admin user is assigned to a preconfigured list that is named defaultList and that you cannot delete.
Configure an HTTP Authentication List
You can configure the default HTTP login list.
To change the HTTP authentication method for the default list:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTP Authentication
List
.
The HTTP Authentication List page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the httpList name.
Manage Device Security
252
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
7.
From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in the selected authentication login list.
If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as
Local
, no other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. User authentication occurs in the order the methods are selected. Possible methods are as follows:
• Local
. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. Since the Local method does not time out, if you select this option as the first method, no other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method.
• Radius
. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server. If you select
Radius
as the first method and an error occurs during the authentication, the switch uses Method 2 to authenticate the user.
• Tacacs+
. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the TACACS+ server.
If you select
Tacacs+
as the first method and an error occurs during the authentication, the switch attempts user authentication Method 2.
• None
. The authentication method is unspecified. This option is available only for
Method 2 and Method 3.
8.
From the menu in the 2 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used second in the selected authentication login list.
This is the method that is used if the first method times out. If you select a method that does not time out as the second method, the third method is not tried.
9.
From the menu in the 3 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used third in the selected authentication login list.
10.
From the menu in the 4 column, select the method, if any, that must be used fourth in the selected authentication login list.
This is the method that is used if all previous methods time out.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure an HTTPS Authentication List
You can configure the default login list for secure HTTP (HTTPS).
To configure an HTTPS authentication list:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Manage Device Security
253
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTPS Authentication
List
.
The HTTPS Authentication List page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the httpsList name.
7.
From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in the selected authentication login list.
If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as
Local
, no other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. This setting does not display when you first create a new login list. User authentication occurs in the order the methods are selected. Possible methods are as follows:
• Local
. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. Since the Local method does not time out, if you select this option as the first method, no other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method.
• Radius
. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server. If you select
Radius
as the first method and an error occurs during the authentication, the switch uses Method 2 to authenticate the user.
• Tacacs+
. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the TACACS+ server.
If you select
Tacacs+
as the first method and an error occurs during the authentication, the switch attempts user authentication Method 2.
• None
. The authentication method is unspecified. This option is only available for
Method 2 and Method 3.
8.
From the menu in the 2 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used second in the selected authentication login list.
This is the method that is used if the first method times out. If you select a method that does not time out as the second method, the third method is not tried.
9.
From the menu in the 3 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used third in the selected authentication login list.
10.
From the menu in the 4 column, select the method, if any, that must be used fourth in the selected authentication login list.
This is the method that is used if all previous methods time out.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
254
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure the Dot1x Authentication List
The Dot1x authentication list defines the IEEE 802.1X authentication method used for the default list. The default list is dot1xList.
To configure the dot1x authentication list:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Management Security > Authentication List > Dot1x Authentication
List
.
The Dot1x Authentication List page displays.
6.
Select the check box next to the dot1xList name.
7.
From the menu in the 1 column, select the method that must be used as the first method in the selected authentication login list.
The options are as follows:
• Local
. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication.
• None
. The user is not authenticated.
• Radius
. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
255
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure Management Access
You can configure HTTP and secure HTTP access to the switch management interface. You can also configure access control profiles and access rules.
Configure HTTP Settings
You can configure the settings for HTTP access to the switch.
To configure the HTTP server settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Access > HTTP > HTTP Configuration
.
The HTTP Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
HTTP Session Soft Timeout
field, specify the number of minutes an HTTP session can be idle before a time-out occurs.
The value must be in the range of 0–60 minutes. The default value is 5 minutes. The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed.
After the session is inactive for the configured time, you are automatically logged out and must reenter the password to access the management interface. A value of zero means that the session does not time out.
7.
In the
HTTP Session Hard Timeout
field, specify the hard time-out for HTTP sessions.
This time-out is unaffected by the activity level of the session. The value must be in the range of 0–168 hours. value of zero means that the session does not time out. The default value is 24 hours.
8.
In the
Maximum Number of HTTP Sessions
field, specify the maximum number of HTTP sessions that can exist at the same time.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
256
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
HTTPS Configuration
Secure HTTP enables the transmission of HTTP over an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) connection. When you manage the switch by using a web interface, Secure HTTP can help ensure that communication between the management system and the switch is protected from eavesdroppers and man-in-the-middle attacks.
You can configure the settings for HTTPS access to the switch.
To configure HTTPS settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Access > HTTPS > HTTPS Configuration
.
The HTTPS Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the HTTPS Admin Mode
Enable
or
Disable
radio button.
This enables or disables the administrative mode of secure HTTP (HTTPS). The configured value is displayed. The default value is Disable. You can download SSL certificates only when the HTTPS admin mode is disabled. HTTPS admin mode can be enabled only if a certificate is present on the device.
7.
Select the SSL Version 3
Enable
or
Disable
radio button.
This enables or disables Secure Sockets Layer version 3.0. The configured value is displayed. The default value is Enable.
8.
Select the TLS Version 1
Enable
or
Disable
radio button.
This enables or disables Transport Layer Security version 1.0. The configured value is displayed. The default value is
Enable
.
9.
In the
HTTPS Port
field, type the HTTPS port number.
The value must be in the range of 1025 to 65535. Port 443 is the default value. The configured value is displayed.
Manage Device Security
257
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
10.
In the
HTTPS Session Soft Timeout (Minutes)
field, enter the inactivity time-out for HTTPS sessions.
The value must be in the range of 1 to 60 minutes. The default value is 5 minutes. The configured value is displayed.
After the session is inactive for the configured time, you are automatically logged out and must reenter the password to access the management interface. A value of zero means that the session does not time out.
11.
In the
HTTPS Session Hard Timeout (Hours)
field, set the hard time-out for HTTPS sessions.
This time-out is unaffected by the activity level of the session. The value must be in the range of 1 to 168 hours. The default value is 24 hours.
12.
In the
Maximum Number of HTTPS Sessions
field, enter the maximum allowable number of HTTPS sessions.
The value must be in the range of 0 to 4. The default value is 4.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Certificates
You can manage certificates.
Generate an SSL Certificate
To generate an SSL certificate:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Access > HTTPS > Certificate Management
.
The Certificate Management page displays.
Manage Device Security
258
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The Certificate Present field displays whether a certificate is present on the switch.
6.
In the Certificate Management area, select
Generate Certificates
.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
The switch generates an SSL certificate.
The Certificate Generation Status field shows information about the progress.
Delete an SSL Certificate
To delete an SSL certificate:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security
>
Access > HTTPS
>
Certificate Management
.
The Certificate Management page displays.
The Certificate Present field displays Yes.
6.
In the Certificate Management area, select
Delete Certificates
.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
The certificate is removed.
Download Certificates
You can transfer a certificate file to the switch.
For the web server on the switch to accept HTTPS connections from a management station, the web server needs a public key certificate. You can generate a certificate externally (for example, offline) and download it to the switch.
Before you download a file to the switch, the following conditions must be true:
•
The file to download from the TFTP server is on the server in the appropriate directory.
•
The file is in the correct format.
Manage Device Security
259
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
The switch contains a path to the TFTP server.
To configure the certificate download settings for HTTPS sessions:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Access > HTTPS > Certificate Download
.
The Certificate Download page displays.
6.
From the
File Type
menu, select the type of SSL certificate to download, which can be one of the following:
• SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File
. SSL Trusted Root Certificate file (PEM
Encoded)
• SSL Server Certificate PEM File
. SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded)
• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File
. SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak Encryption
Parameter file (PEM Encoded)
• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File
. SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded)
7.
From the
Server Address Type
menu, select
IPv4
or
DNS
to indicate the format of the
TFTP/SFTP/SCP Server Address field.
The default is IPv4.
8.
In the
TFTP Server IP
field, specify the address of the TFTP server.
The address can be an IP address in standard x.x.x.x format or a host name. The host name must start with a letter of the alphabet. Make sure that the software image or other file to be downloaded is available on the TFTP server.
9.
In the
Remote File Path
field, enter the path of the file to download.
You can enter up to 96 characters. The default is blank.
10.
In the
Remote File Name
field, enter the name of the file on the TFTP server to download.
You can enter up to 32 characters. The default is blank.
Manage Device Security
260
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
11.
Select the
Start File Transfer
check box.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
The file transfer starts. A status message displays during the transfer and upon successful completion of the transfer.
Access Control
Access control allows you to configure a profile and set access rules.
Configure an Access Control Profile
You can set up a security access profile.
To configure an access profile:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Access > Access Control > Access Profile Configuration
.
The Access Profile Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
Access Profile Name
field, enter the name of the access profile to be added.
The maximum length is 32 characters.
7.
Select one of the following check boxes:
• Activate Profile
. Activate an access profile.
• Deactivate Profile
. Deactivate an access profile.
• Remove Profile
. Remove an access profile. The access profile must be deactivated before you remove the access profile.
The Packets Filtered field displays the number of packets filtered.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
261
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
9.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.
Table 69. Access profile configuration profile summary
Field
Rule Type
Service Type
Source IP Address
Mask
Priority
Description
The action performed when the rules match.
The selected service type. The policy is restricted by the selected service type chosen. The possible methods are HTTP, and secure HTTP (SSL).
Source IP address of the client originating the management traffic.
The subnet mask of the IP Address of the client originating the management traffic.
The priority of the rule. The rules are validated against the incoming management request in the ascending order of their priorities. If a rule matches, action is performed and subsequent rules are ignored. For example, if a source IP address of 10.10.10.10 is configured with priority 1 to permit and source IP address
10.10.10.10 is configured with priority 2 to deny, access is permitted if the profile is active, and the second rule is ignored.
Configure Access Rule Settings
You can add security access rules. You can apply changes an the access rule only when the access profile is in a deactivated state.
Note:
Make sure that you create the access profile before you add rules.
To configure access rules:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Access > Access Control > Access Rule Configuration
.
Manage Device Security
262
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The Access Rule Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Rule Type
menu, select
Permit
or
Deny
to permit or deny access when the selected rules are matched.
A Permit rule allows access by traffic that matches the rule criteria. A Deny rule blocks traffic that matches the rule criteria.
7.
From the
Service Type
menu, select the access method to which the rule is applied.
The policy is restricted by the selected access method. The possible access methods are
TFTP, HTTP, and Secure HTTP (SSL).
8.
In the
Source IP Address
field, enter the source IP address of the client originating the management traffic.
9.
In the
Mask
field, specify the subnet mask of the client that originates the management traffic.
10.
In the
Priority
field, assign a priority to the rule.
The rules are validated against the incoming management request in ascending order of their priorities. If a rule matches, the action is performed and subsequent rules are ignored. For example, if a source IP 10.10.10.10 is configured with priority 1 to permit and source IP 10.10.10.10 is configured with priority 2 to deny, access is permitted if the profile is active, and the second rule is ignored.
11.
Click the
Add
button.
The access rule is added.
Configure Port Authentication
With port-based authentication, when 802.1X is enabled globally and on the port, successful authentication of any one supplicant attached to the port results in all users being able to use the port without restrictions. At any time, only one supplicant is allowed to attempt authentication on a port in this mode. Ports in this mode are under bidirectional control. This is the default authentication mode.
An 802.1X network includes three components:
• Authenticators
. The port that is authenticated before system access is permitted.
• Supplicants
. The host connected to the authenticated port requesting access to the system services.
• Authentication Server
. The external server, for example, the RADIUS server that performs the authentication on behalf of the authenticator, and indicates whether the user is authorized to access system services.
Manage Device Security
263
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure Global 802.1X Settings
You can configure global port access control settings on the switch.
To globally enable all 802.1X features:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Port Authentication > Basic > 802.1X Configuration
.
The 802.1X Configuration page displays.
6.
Next to Port Based Authentication State, select the
Enable
radio button.
This enables or disables 802.1X administrative mode on the switch.
Note:
If 802.1X is enabled, authentication is performed by a RADIUS server.
This means that the primary authentication method must be RADIUS. To set the method, select
Security > Management Security >
Authentication List
and select
RADIUS
as method 1 for defaultList. For more information, see
Configure Authentication Lists
When port-based authentication is globally disabled, the switch does not check for
802.1X authentication before allowing traffic on any ports, even if the ports are configured to allow only authenticated users.
7.
In the
VLAN Assignment Mode
field, select the
Enable
radio button.
The default value is Disable.
When enabled, this feature allows a port to be placed into a particular VLAN based on the result of the authentication or type of 802.1X authentication a client uses when it accesses the device. The authentication server can provide information to the device about which VLAN must be assigned the supplicant.
8.
Next to Dynamic VLAN Creation Mode, select the
Enable
radio button.
The default value is Disable.
Manage Device Security
264
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If RADIUS-assigned VLANs are enabled, the RADIUS server is includes the VLAN ID in the 802.1X tunnel attributes of its response message to the device. If dynamic VLAN creation is enabled on the device and the RADIUS-assigned VLAN does not exist, then the assigned VLAN is dynamically created. This implies that the client can connect from any port and can get assigned to the appropriate VLAN. This feature gives flexibility for clients to move around the network without much additional configuration required.
9.
Next to EAPOL Flood Mode, select the
Enable
radio button.
The default value is Disable. Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over LAN (EAPoL) flood support is enabled on the switch.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Port Authentication
You can enable and configure port access control on one or more ports.
Configure 802.1X Settings for a Port
To configure 802.1X settings for a port:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Port Authentication
.
The Port Authentication page displays.
6.
To view more fields, move the horizontal bar at the bottom of the page to the right.
7.
Select the check box next to the port.
You can also select multiple check boxes to apply the same settings to the selected ports, or select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all ports.
Manage Device Security
265
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
8.
Specify the following settings:
• Port Control
. Defines the port authorization state. The control mode is set only if the link status of the port is link up. Select one of the following options:
Auto
. The switch automatically detects the mode of the interface.
Authorized
. The switch places the interface into an authorized state without being authenticated. The interface sends and receives normal traffic without client port-based authentication.
Unauthorized
. The switch denies the selected interface access by moving the interface into unauthorized state. The switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface.
MAC based
. Multiple supplicants connected to the same port are allowed to be authenticated individually. Each host connected to the port must de authenticated separately to gain access to the network. The hosts are distinguished by their
MAC addresses.
• MAB
. Specify whether to enable or disable MAC-based Authentication Bypass (MAB) for 802.1x-unaware clients at the specified port. MAB only functions if the port control mode is MAC-based. By default, MAB is disabled.
• Guest VLAN ID
. Specify the VLAN ID for the guest VLAN. The valid range is 0–4093.
The default value is 0. Enter 0 to reset the guest VLAN ID on the interface. The guest
VLAN allows the port to provide a distinguished service to unauthenticated users.
This feature provides a mechanism to allow users access to hosts on the guest VLAN.
• Guest VLAN Period
. Specify the number of seconds that the selected port remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange. The guest VLAN time-out must be a value in the range of 1–300. The default value is 90.
• Unauthenticated VLAN ID
. Specify the VLAN ID of the unauthenticated VLAN for the selected port. The valid range is 0–3965. The default value is 0. Hosts that fail the authentication might be denied access to the network or placed on a VLAN created for unauthenticated clients. This VLAN might be configured with limited network access.
• Periodic Reauthentication
. Select
Enable
to allow periodic reauthentication of the supplicant for the specified port.
• Reauthentication Period
. Specify the time, in seconds, after which reauthentication of the supplicant occurs. The reauthentication period must be a value in the range of
1–65535. The default value is 3600. If this field is disabled, connected clients are not forced to reauthenticate periodically.
• Quiet Period
. Specify the number of seconds that the port remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange. While in the quite state, the port does not attempt to acquire a supplicant.
• Resending EAP
. Specify the EAP retransmit period for the selected port. The transmit period is the value, in seconds, after which an EAPoL EAP Request/Identify frame is resent to the supplicant.
• Max EAP Requests
. Specify the maximum number of EAP requests for the selected port. The value is the maximum number of times an EAPoL EAP Request/Identity message is retransmitted before the supplicant times out.
Manage Device Security
266
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Supplicant Timeout
. Specify the supplicant time-out for the selected port. The supplicant time-out is the value, in seconds, after which the supplicant times out.
• Server Timeout
. Specify the time that elapses before the switch resends a request to the authentication server.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the port authentication status information available on the page.
Table 70. Port authentication status information
Field
Control Direction
Protocol Version
PAE Capabilities
Authenticator PAE State
Backend State
Description
The control direction for the specified port, which is always Both. The control direction dictates the degree to which protocol exchanges take place between supplicant and authenticator. The unauthorized controlled port exerts control over communication in both directions (disabling both incoming and outgoing frames).
The protocol version associated with the selected port. The only possible value is 1, corresponding to the first version of the 802.1X specification.
The port access entity (PAE) functionality of the selected port. Possible values are Authenticator or Supplicant.
The current state of the authenticator PAE component. Possible values are as follows:
Initialize
Disconnected
Connecting
Authenticating
Authenticated
Aborting
Held
ForceAuthorized
ForceUnauthorized
The current state of the backend authentication component. Possible values are as follows:
Request
Response
Success
Fail
Timeout
Initialize
Idle
Manage Device Security
267
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Initialize 802.1X on a Port
To initialize 802.1X on a port
:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Port Authentication
.
The Port Authentication page displays.
6.
Select the check box associated with the port to initialize.
7.
Click the
Initialize
button.
802.1X on the selected interface is reset to the initialization state. Traffic sent to and from the port is blocked during the authentication process. This button is available only if the control mode is auto. When you click this button, the action is immediate. You do not need to click the
Apply
button for the action to occur.
Restart the 802.1X Authentication Process on a Port
To restart the 802.1X authentication process on a port:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
Manage Device Security
268
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Port Authentication
.
The Port Authentication page displays.
6.
Select the check box associated with the port to reauthenticate.
7.
Click the
Reauthenticate
button.
The selected port is forced to restart the authentication process.This button is available only if the control mode is auto. If the button is not selectable, it is grayed out. When you click this button, the action is immediate. You do not need to click the
Apply
button for the action to occur.
View the Port Summary
You can view summary information about the port-based authentication settings for each port.
To view the port summary:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Port Summary
.
The Port Summary page displays.
Manage Device Security
269
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the fields on the Port Summary page.
Table 71. Port summary
Field
Port
Control Mode
Operating Control Mode
Description
The port for which the settings are displayed in the current table row.
Indicates the configured control mode for the port. Possible values are as follows:
• Auto
. The switch sets the port mode based on the authentication exchanges between the supplicant, authenticator, and the authentication server.
• Force Unauthorized
. The switch denies the interface access by moving the interface into the unauthorized state. The switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface.
• Force Authorized
. The switch places the interface in an authorized state without the need for authentication. The interface sends and receives normal traffic without client port-based authentication.
• MAC Based
. The switch sets the port mode based on the authentication exchanges between the supplicant, authenticator, and authentication server on a per-supplicant basis.
The control mode under which the port is actually operating. Possible values are as follows:
• ForceUnauthorized
• ForceAuthorized
• Auto
• MAC Based
• N/A
. If the port is in detached state, it cannot participate in port access control.
Reauthentication Enabled Displays whether reauthentication is enabled on the selected port. The possible values are true and False. If the value is true, reauthentication occurs. Otherwise, reauthentication is not allowed.
Port Status The authorization status of the specified port. The possible values are Authorized,
Unauthorized, and N/A. If the port is in detached state, the value is N/A because the port cannot participate in port access control.
View the Client Summary
You can displays information about supplicant devices that are connected to the local authenticator ports. If no active 802.1X sessions exist, the table is empty.
To view the client summary:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
Manage Device Security
270
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Port Authentication > Advanced > Client Summary
.
The Client Summary page displays.
The following table describes the fields on the Client Summary page.
Table 72. Client Summary information
Field
Port
User Name
Description
The port to be displayed.
The name the client uses to identify itself as a supplicant to the authentication server.
Supplicant Mac Address The MAC address of the supplicant that is connected to the port.
Session Time The time in seconds since the supplicant was granted access.
Filter ID
VLAN ID
VLAN Assigned
Session Timeout
Termination Action
The policy filter ID assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device.
The ID of the VLAN the supplicant was placed in as a result of the authentication process.
The reason why the supplicant was placed in the VLAN.
The reauthentication time-out period set by the RADIUS server to the supplicant device.
The termination action set by the RADIUS server that indicates the action that occurs when the supplicant session times out.
Manage Device Security
271
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Set Up Traffic Control
You can configure MAC filters, storm control, port security, protected port, and private VLAN settings.
Manage MAC Filtering
You can create MAC filters that limit the traffic allowed into and out of specified ports on the switch.
Create a MAC Filter
To create a MAC filter:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > MAC Filter > MAC Filter Configuration
.
The MAC Filter Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
MAC Filter
menu, select
Create Filter
.
If you did not configure any filters, this is the only option available.
7.
From the
VLAN ID
menu, select the VLAN that must be used with the MAC address.
8.
In the
MAC Address
field, specify the MAC address of the filter in the format
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
You cannot define filters for the following MAC addresses:
•
00:00:00:00:00:00
•
01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:0F
•
01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21
•
FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Manage Device Security
272
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
9.
In the Port and LAG tables in the Source Port Members section, select the ports and LAGs that must be included in the inbound filter.
If a packet with the MAC address and VLAN ID that you specify is received on a port that is not part of the inbound filter, the packet is dropped.
10.
In the Port and LAG tables in the Destination Port Members section, select the ports and
LAGs that must be included in the outbound filter.
A packet with the MAC address and VLAN ID that you specify can be transmitted only from a port that is part of the outbound filter.
Note:
Destination ports can be included only in a multicast filter.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete a MAC FIlter
To delete a MAC filter:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > MAC Filter > MAC Filter Configuration
.
The MAC Filter Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
MAC Filter
menu, select the filter.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The filter is removed.
Manage Device Security
273
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View the MAC Filter Summary
You can view the MAC filters that are configured on the switch.
To view the MAC filter summary:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > MAC Filter > MAC Filter Summary
.
The MAC Filter Summary page displays.
The following table describes the information displayed on the page.
Table 73. MAC Filter Summary information
Field
MAC Address
VLAN ID
Source Port Members
Description
The MAC address of the filter in the format XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
The VLAN ID used with the MAC address to fully identify packets you want filtered.
A list of ports that are used for filtering inbound packets.
Destination Port Members A list of ports that are used for filtering outbound packets.
Configure Storm Control
A broadcast storm is the result of an excessive number of broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port. Forwarded message responses can overload network resources, cause the network to time out, or do both.
The switch measures the incoming packet rate per port for broadcast, multicast, unknown, and unicast packets and discards packets if the rate exceeds the defined value. You can enable storm control globally and per interface, by defining the packet type and the rate at which the packets are transmitted.
Manage Device Security
274
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To configure storm control settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Storm Control
.
The Storm Control page displays.
6.
In the Storm Control section, from the
Ingress Control Mode
menu, select the mode of broadcast affected by storm control:
• Disabled
. Storm control is disabled. This is the default setting.
• Unknown Unicast
. If the rate of incoming unknown Layer 2 unicast traffic (that is, traffic for which a destination lookup failure occurs) increases beyond the configured threshold on an interface, the traffic is dropped.
• Multicast
. If the rate of incoming Layer 2 multicast traffic increases beyond the configured threshold on an interface, the traffic is dropped.
• Broadcast
. If the rate of incoming Layer 2 broadcast traffic increases beyond the configured threshold on an interface, the traffic is dropped.
7.
In the Storm Control section, if the selection from the
Ingress Control Mode
menu is
not
Disabled
, specify whether the ingress control mode is enabled by selecting
Enable
or
Disable
from the
Status
menu.
8.
In the Storm Control section, in the
Threshold
field, specify the maximum rate at which unknown packets are forwarded.
The range is a percent of the total threshold between 0–100%. The default is 5%.
9.
In the Storm Control section, from the
Control Action
mode menu, select one of the following options:
• None
. This is the default setting.
• Trap
. If the threshold of the configured broadcast storm is exceeded, a trap is sent.
• Shutdown
. If the threshold of the configured broadcast storm is exceeded, the port is shut down.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Manage Device Security
275
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Your settings are saved.
11.
To enable or disable storm control for one or more ports or to specify different threshold and control action settings for one or more ports, do the following:
a.
In the Port Settings section, select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
b.
In the Port Settings section, if the selection from the
Ingress Control Mode
menu is
not
Disabled
, specify whether the ingress control mode is enabled by selecting
Enable
or
Disable
from the
Status
menu in the table heading.
c.
In the Port Settings section, in the
Threshold
field in the table heading, specify the maximum rate at which unknown packets are forwarded.
The range is a percent of the total threshold between 0–100%. The default is 5%.
d.
In the Port Settings section, from the
Control Action
mode menu in the table heading, select one of the following options:
• None
. This is the default setting.
• Trap
. If the threshold of the configured broadcast storm is exceeded, a trap is sent.
• Shutdown
. If the threshold of the configured broadcast storm is exceeded, the port is shut down.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Port Security
Port security lets you lock one or more ports on the switch. When a port is locked, only packets with an allowable source MAC addresses can be forwarded. All other packets are discarded.
Configure the Global Port Security Mode
To configure the global port security mode:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Manage Device Security
276
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Port Security > Port Security Configuration
.
The Port Security Configuration page displays.
6.
To enable port security on the switch, select the Port Security Mode
Enable
radio button.
The default is Disable.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
8.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
The Port Security Violations table shows information about violations that occurred on ports that are enabled for port security.
The following table describes the fields in the Port Security Violations table.
Table 74. Port Security Violations information
Field
Port
Last Violation MAC
VLAN ID
Description
The physical interface.
The source MAC address of the last packet that was discarded at a locked port.
The VLAN ID corresponding to the last MAC address violation.
Configure a Port Security Interface
A MAC address can be defined as allowable by one of two methods: dynamically or statically.
Both methods are used concurrently when a port is locked.
Dynamic locking implements a first arrival mechanism for port security. You specify how many addresses can be learned on the locked port. If the limit was not reached, then a packet with an unknown source MAC address is learned and forwarded normally. When the limit is reached, no more addresses are learned on the port. Any packets with source MAC addresses that were not already learned are discarded. You can effectively disable dynamic locking by setting the number of allowable dynamic entries to zero.
Static locking allows you to specify a list of MAC addresses that are allowed on a port. The behavior of packets is the same as for dynamic locking: only packets with an allowable source MAC address can be forwarded.
Manage Device Security
277
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To configure port security settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Port Security > Interface Configuration
.
The Interface Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
Specify the following settings:
• Port Security
. Enable or disable the port security feature for the selected interfaces
The default is Disable.
• Max Learned MAC Address
. Specify the maximum number of dynamically learned
MAC addresses on the selected interfaces.
• Max Static MAC Address
. Specify the maximum number of statically locked MAC addresses on the selected interfaces.
• Enable Violation Shutdown
. Enable or disable shutdown of the selected interfaces if a packet with a disallowed MAC address is received. The default value is No, which means that the option is disabled.
• Enable Violation Traps
. Enable or disable the sending of new violation traps if a packet with a disallowed MAC address is received. The default value is No, which means that the option is disabled.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
278
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
View Learned MAC Addresses and Convert Them to Static MAC Addresses
You can convert a dynamically learned MAC address to a statically locked address.
To view learned MAC addresses for an individual interface or LAG and convert these
MAC addresses to static MAC addresses:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Port Security > Port Security Configuration
.
The Port Security Configuration page displays.
6.
Make sure that port security is globally enabled.
For more information, see
Configure the Global Port Security Mode
on page 276.
7.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Port Security > Interface Configuration
.
The Interface Configuration page displays.
8.
Make sure that port security is enabled for the individual interface for which you want to view the dynamically learned MAC addresses.
For more information, see
Configure a Port Security Interface
on page 277.
9.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Port Security > Security MAC Address
.
The Security MAC Address page displays.
10.
From the
Port List
menu, select the individual interface.
The Dynamic MAC Address Table displays the MAC addresses and their associated
VLANs that were learned on the selected port.
Field
VLAN ID
MAC Address
Description
The VLAN ID corresponding to the MAC address.
The MAC addresses learned on a specific port.
Manage Device Security
279
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
11.
To convert the dynamically learned MAC address to a statically locked addresses, select the
Convert Dynamic Address to Static
check box.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
The dynamic MAC address entries are converted to static MAC address entries in a numerically ascending order until the static limit is reached.
The Number of Dynamic MAC Addresses Learned field displays the number of dynamically learned MAC addresses on a specific port.
13.
To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the
Refresh
button.
Configure Protected Ports
You can configure the ports as protected or unprotected. If a port is configured as protected, it does not forward traffic to any other protected port on the switch, but it does forward traffic to unprotected ports.
To configure protected ports:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Protected Port
.
The Protected Port page displays.
6.
In the Ports table, click each port that you want to configure as a protected port.
Protected ports are marked with a check mark. No traffic forwarding is possible between two protected ports.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
280
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure a Private VLAN
A private VLAN contains switch ports that cannot communicate with each other, but can access another network. These ports are called private ports. Each private VLAN contains one or more private ports and a single uplink port or uplink aggregation group. Note that all traffic between private ports is blocked at all layers, not just Layer 2 traffic, but also traffic such as FTP, HTTP, and Telnet.
To configure a private VLAN type:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private Vlan Type Configuration
.
The Private VLAN Type Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box that is associated with the VLAN ID that you want to configure.
7.
From the
Private VLAN Type
menu, select the type of private VLAN. Possible values are as follows:
• Primary
. Sets the private VLAN type as primary.
• Isolated
. Sets the private VLAN type as isolated.
• Community
. Sets the private VLAN type as community.
• Unconfigured
. Sets the private VLAN type as unconfigured. The default is
Unconfigured.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
281
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Configure Private VLAN Association Settings
To configure private VLAN association:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private Vlan Association
Configuration
.
The Private VLAN Association page displays.
6.
From the
Primary VLAN
menu, select the primary VLAN ID of the domain.
7.
In the
Secondary VLAN(s)
field, enter the VLAN that you want to associate with the primary VLAN.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 75. Private VLAN Association information
Field
Isolated VLAN
Community VLAN(s)
Description
The isolated VLAN associated with the selected primary VLAN.
The list of community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN.
Configure the Private VLAN Port Mode
To configure the private VLAN port mode:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
Manage Device Security
282
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private Vlan Port Mode
Configuration
.
The Private Vlan Port Mode Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
From the
Port VLAN Mode
menu, select the switch port mode:
• General
. Sets the interfaces in general mode, which is the default selection.
• Host
. Sets the interfaces in host mode, which is used for private VLAN configurations.
• Promiscuous
. Sets the interfaces in promiscuous mode, which is used for private
VLAN configurations.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a Private VLAN Host Interface
To configure a private VLAN host interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Manage Device Security
283
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private Vlan Host Interface
Configuration
.
The Private VLAN Host Interface Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
In the
Host Primary VLAN
field, enter the primary VLAN ID for the host association mode.
The range of the VLAN ID is 2–4093.
9.
In the
Host Secondary VLAN
field, enter the secondary VLAN ID for host association mode.
The range of the VLAN ID is 2–4093.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The Operational VLAN(s) field displays the operational VLANs.
Configure a Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface
To configure a private VLAN promiscuous interface:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Manage Device Security
284
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > Traffic Control > Private VLAN > Private Vlan Promiscuous Interface
Configuration
.
The Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface Configuration page displays.
6.
To display information for all ports and LAGs, click the
All
link.
7.
Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:
•
To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type the port number in the
Go To Interface
field and click the
Go
button.
•
To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box associated with each interface.
•
To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.
8.
In the
Promiscuous Primary VLAN
field, enter the primary VLAN ID for the promiscuous association mode.
The range of the VLAN ID is 2–4093.
9.
In the
Promiscuous Secondary VLAN(s)
field, enter the secondary VLAN ID for promiscuous association mode.
This field can accept single a VLAN ID, a range of VLAN IDs, or a combination of both in sequence separated by a comma. You can specify an individual VLAN ID, such as 10.
You can specify the VLAN range values separated by a hyphen, for example, 10-13. You can specify the combination of both separated by commas, for example,
12,15,40-43,1000-1005, 2000. The range of VLAN IDs is 2–4093.
Note:
The VLAN ID list that you specify replaces the configured secondary
VLAN list in the association.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The Operational VLAN(s) field displays the operational VLANs.
Configure Access Control Lists
Access control lists (ACLs) ensure that only authorized users can access specific resources while blocking off any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources. ACLs are used to provide traffic flow control, restrict contents of routing updates, decide which types of traffic are forwarded or blocked, and above all provide security for the network. The switch’s software supports IPv4, IPv6, and MAC ACLs.
Manage Device Security
285
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To configure an ACL:
1.
Create an IPv4-based or IPv6-based or MAC-based ACL ID.
2.
Create a rule and assign it to a unique ACL ID.
3.
Define the rules, which can identify protocols, source, and destination IP and MAC addresses, and other packet-matching criteria.
4.
Use the ID number to assign the ACL to a port or to a LAG.
To view ACL configuration examples, see
Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL
The ACL Wizard helps you create a simple ACL and apply it to the selected ports easily and quickly. First, select an ACL type to use when you create an ACL. Then add an ACL rule to this ACL and apply this ACL on the selected ports. The ACL Wizard allows you to create the
ACL, but does not allow you to modify it. For information about modifying an ACL, see
Note:
The steps in the following procedure describe how you can create an
ACL based on the destination MAC address. If you select a different type of ACL (for example, an ACL based on a source IPv4), the page displays different information.
Use the ACL Wizard to create an ACL
To use the ACL Wizard to create an ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > ACL Wizard
.
Manage Device Security
286
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
From the
ACL Type
menu, select the type of ACL.
You can select from the following ACL types:
• ACL Based on Destination MAC
. Creates an ACL based on the destination MAC address, destination MAC mask, and VLAN.
• ACL Based on Source MAC
. Creates an ACL based on the source MAC address, source MAC mask, and VLAN.
• ACL Based on Destination IPv4
. Creates an ACL based on the destination IPv4 address and IPv4 address mask.
• ACL Based on Source IPv4
. Creates an ACL based on the source IPv4 address and
IPv4 address mask.
• ACL Based on Destination IPv6
. Creates an ACL based on the destination IPv6 prefix and IPv6 prefix length.
• ACL Based on Source IPv6.
Creates an ACL based on the source IPv6 prefix and
IPv6 prefix length.
• ACL Based on Destination IPv4 L4 Port
. Creates an ACL based on the destination
IPv4 Layer 4 port number.
• ACL Based on Source IPv4 L4 Port
. Creates an ACL based on the source IPv4
Layer 4 port number.
• ACL Based on Destination IPv6 L4 Port
. Creates an ACL based on the destination
IPv6 Layer 4 port number.
• ACL Based on Source IPv6 L4 Port
. Creates an ACL based on the source IPv6
Layer 4 port number.
Manage Device Security
287
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Note:
For L4 port options, two rules are created (one for TCP and one for UDP).
7.
In the
Sequence Number
field, enter a whole number in the range of 1 to 2147483647 that is used to identify the rule.
8.
From the
Action
menu, select
Permit
or
Den
y to specify the action that must be taken if a packet matches the rule’s criteria.
If a packet matches a rule with a permit action, the packet is allowed to continue toward its destination. If a packet matches a rule with a deny action, the packet is dropped.
9.
From the
Match Every
menu, select one of the following options:
• False
. Signifies that packets do not need to match the selected ACL and rule. With this selection, you can add a destination MAC address, destination MAC mask, and
VLAN.
• True
. Signifies that all packets must match the selected ACL and rule and are either permitted or denied. In this case, since all packets match the rule, you cannot configure other match criteria.
10.
Specify the additional match criteria for the selected ACL type.
The rest of the rule match criteria fields available for configuration depend on the selected
ACL type. For information about the possible match criteria fields, see the following table.
ACL Based On
Destination MAC
Source MAC
Destination IPv4
Source IPv4
Destination IPv6
Source IPv6
Fields
• Destination MAC
. Specify the destination MAC address to compare against an Ethernet frame. The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword might be specified using a destination MAC address of 01:80:C2:xx:xx:xx.
• Destination MAC Mask
. Specify the destination MAC address mask, which represents the bits in the destination MAC address to compare against an
Ethernet frame. The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword might be specified using a destination MAC mask of 00:00:00:ff:ff:ff.
• VLAN
. Specify the VLAN ID to match within the Ethernet frame.
• Source MAC
. Specify the source MAC address to compare against an
Ethernet frame. The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
• Source MAC Mask
. Specify the source MAC address mask, which represents the bits in the source MAC address to compare against an
Ethernet frame. The valid format is (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx).
• VLAN
. Specify the VLAN ID to match within the Ethernet frame.
• Destination IP Address
. Specify the destination IP address.
• Destination IP Mask
. Specify the destination IP address mask.
• Source IP Address
. Specify the source IP address.
• Source IP Mask
. Specify the source IP address mask.
• Destination Prefix
. Specify the destination prefix.
• Destination Prefix Length
. Specify the destination prefix length.
• Source Prefix
. Specify the source destination prefix.
• Source Prefix Length
. Specify the source prefix length.
Manage Device Security
288
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
ACL Based On
Destination IPv4 L4 Port
Fields
• Destination L4 port (protocol)
. Specify the destination IPv4 L4 port protocol.
• Destination L4 port (value)
. Specify the destination IPv4 L4 port value.
Source IPv4 L4 Port
Destination IPv6 L4 Port
• Destination L4 port (protocol)
. Specify the destination IPv6 L4 port protocol.
• Destination L4 port (value)
. Specify the destination IPv6 L4 port value.
Source IPv6 L4 Port
• Source L4 port (protocol)
. Specify the source IPv4 L4 port protocol.
• Source L4 port (value)
. Specify the source IPv4 L4 port value.
• Source L4 port (protocol)
. Specify the source IPv6 L4 port protocol.
• Source L4 port (value)
. Specify the source IPv6 L4 port value.
11.
For this procedure (in which an ACL based on the destination MAC address is created), configure the following settings:
a.
In the
Destination MAC
field, specify the destination MAC address that must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword can be specified using a destination MAC address of 01:80:C2:xx:xx:xx.
b.
In the
Destination MAC Mask
field, specify the destination MAC address mask that must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword can be specified using a destination MAC mask of 00:00:00:ff:ff:ff.
c.
In the
VLAN ID
field, specify which VLAN must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
Valid range of values is 1 to 4093. Either a VLAN range or VLAN can be configured.
d.
In the Binding Configuration section, from the
Direction
menu, select the packet filtering direction for the ACL.
Only the inbound direction is valid.
e.
In the Ports and LAG tables in the Binding Configuration section, select the ports and LAGs to which the ACL must be applied.
f.
Click the
Add
button.
The rule is added to the ACL and is based on the destination MAC.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
289
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Modify an ACL Rule
To modify an ACL rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > ACL Wizard
.
The ACL Wizard page displays.
6.
Select check box that is associated with the rule.
7.
Update the match criteria as needed.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete an ACL Rule
To delete an ACL rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Manage Device Security
290
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
Security > ACL > ACL Wizard
.
The ACL Wizard page displays.
6.
Select check box that is associated with the rule.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The rule is removed.
ACL Wizard Example
In the following figure, the ACL rule is configured to check for packet matches on ports 4, 5, and 9 and on LAG 1. Only the Inbound option is valid. Packets that include a source address in the 192.168.3.0/16 network are permitted to be forwarded by the interfaces. All other packets are dropped because every ACL includes an implicit
deny all
rule as the last rule.
For information about the ACL Wizard, see
Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL
Configure a Basic MAC ACL
A MAC ACL consists of a set of rules that are matched sequentially against a packet. When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule, the specified rule action (Permit or Deny) is taken, and the additional rules are not checked for a match.
Manage Device Security
291
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Multiple steps are involved in defining a MAC ACL and applying it to the switch:
1.
Create the ACL ID.
2.
Create a MAC rule.
3.
Associate the MAC ACL with one or more interfaces.
You can view or delete MAC ACL configurations in the MAC Binding table (see
Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table
Add a MAC ACL
To add a MAC ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Basic > MAC ACL
.
The MAC ACL page displays.
The MAC ACL Table displays the number of ACLs currently configured in the switch and the maximum number of ACLs that can be configured. The current size is equal to the number of configured IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs plus the number of configured MAC ACLs.
6.
In the
Name
field, specify a name for the MAC ACL.
The name string can include alphabetic, numeric, hyphen, underscore, or space characters only. The name must start with an alphabetic character.
7.
Click the
Add
button.
The MAC ACL is added.
Each configured ACL displays the following information:
• Rules
. The number of rules currently configured for the MAC ACL.
• Direction
. The direction of packet traffic affected by the MAC ACL, which can be
Inbound or blank.
Manage Device Security
292
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Change the Name of a MAC ACL
To change the name of a MAC ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Basic > MAC ACL
.
The MAC ACL page displays.
6.
Select check box that is associated with the rule.
7.
In the
Name
field, specify the new name.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete a MAC ACL
To delete a MAC ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Manage Device Security
293
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Basic > MAC ACL
.
The MAC ACL page displays.
6.
Select check box that is associated with the rule.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The rule is removed.
Configure MAC ACL Rules
You can define rules for MAC-based ACLs. The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded. A default
deny all
rule is the last rule of every list.
Add a Rule to a MAC ACL
To add a rule to a MAC ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Basic > MAC Rules
.
The previous figure does not show all columns.
6.
From the
ACL Name
menu, select the MAC ACL.
Manage Device Security
294
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
7.
In the
Sequence Number
field, enter a whole number in the range of 1 to 2147483647 to identify the rule.
8.
From the
Action
menu, select the action that must be taken if a packet matches the rule’s criteria:
• Permit
. Forwards packets that meet the ACL criteria.
• Deny
. Drops packets that meet the ACL criteria.
9.
In the
Assign Queue
field, specify the hardware egress queue identifier that must be used to handle all packets matching this ACL rule.
The valid range of queue IDs is 0 to 7.
10.
From the
Mirror Interface
menu, select the specific egress interface to which the matching traffic stream must be copied, in addition to being forwarded normally by the switch.
This field cannot be set if a redirect interface is already configured for the ACL rule. This field is visible for a Permit action.
11.
From the
Redirect Interface
menu, select the egress interface to which the matching traffic stream must be redirected, bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the switch.
This field cannot be set if a mirror interface is already configured for the ACL rule.
12.
From the
Match Every
menu, select whether each Layer 2 MAC packet must be matched against the rule:
• True
. Each packet must match the selected ACL rule.
• False
. Not all packets need to match the selected ACL rule.
13.
In the
CoS
field, specify the 802.1p user priority that must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
The valid range of values is 0 to 7.
14.
In the
Destination MAC
field, specify the destination MAC address that must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword can be specified using a destination MAC address of 01:80:C2:xx:xx:xx.
15.
In the
Destination MAC Mask
field, specify the destination MAC address mask that must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The BPDU keyword can be specified using a destination MAC mask of 00:00:00:ff:ff:ff.
The MAC mask specifies which bits in the MAC address must be compared against an
Ethernet frame. You can use Fs and zeros in the MAC mask, which is in a wildcard format. An F means that the bit is not checked, and a zero in a bit position means that the data must equal the value given for that bit. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, and the mask is 00:00:ff:ff:ff:ff, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). A MAC mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 matches a single MAC address.
Manage Device Security
295
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
16.
From the
EtherType Key
menu, select the EtherType value that must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
The valid values are as follows:
• Appletalk
• ARP
• IBM SNA
• IPv4
• IPv6
• IPX
• MPLS multicast
• MPLS unicast
• NetBios
• Novell
• PPPoE
• RARP
• User Value
17.
If you select
User Value
from the
EtherType
menu, in the
EtherType User Value
field, specify the customized EtherType value that must be used when you select
User Value
from the
EtherType Key
menu.
This value must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame. The valid range of values is 0x0600 to 0xFFFF.
18.
In the
Source MAC
field, specify the source MAC address that must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
19.
In the
Source MAC Mask
field, specify the source MAC address mask that must be compared against the information in an Ethernet frame.
The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
The MAC mask specifies which bits in the MAC address must be compared against an
Ethernet frame. You can use Fs and zeros in the MAC mask, which is in a wildcard format. An F means that the bit is not checked, and a zero in a bit position means that the data must equal the value given for that bit. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, and the mask is 00:00:ff:ff:ff:ff, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). A MAC mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 matches a single MAC address.
20.
In the
VLAN
field, specify the VLAN ID that must be compared against the information in an
Ethernet frame.
The valid range of values is 1 to 4093. Either VLAN range or VLAN can be configured.
21.
From the
Logging
menu, select whether to enable or disable logging.
Manage Device Security
296
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
When set to
Enable
, logging is enabled for this ACL rule (subject to resource availability on the switch). If the access list trap flag is also enabled, periodic traps are generated, indicating the number of times the rule was evoked during the report interval. A fixed five-minute report interval is used for the switch. A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the interval. This field is only supported for a deny action.
22.
Click the
Add
button.
The rule is added.
Change the Match Criteria for a MAC Rule
To change the match criteria for a MAC rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Basic > MAC Rules
.
The MAC Rules page displays.
6.
Select the check box that is associated with the rule.
7.
Modify the fields as needed.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete a Rule for a MAC ACL
To delete a rule for a MAC:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Manage Device Security
297
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Basic > MAC Rules
.
The MAC Rules page displays.
6.
Select the check box that is associated with the rule.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The rule is removed.
Configure MAC Bindings
When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the rules that are defined are applied to the selected interface. You can assign MAC ACL lists to ACL priorities and interfaces.
To configure MAC bindings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Basic > MAC Binding Configuration
.
Manage Device Security
298
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
From the
ACL ID
menu, select an ACL.
The fixed selection from the
Direction
menu is
Inbound
, which means that MAC ACL rules are applied to traffic entering the interface.
7.
In the
Sequence Number
field, optionally specify a number to indicate the order of the access list relative to other access lists already assigned to the interface and direction.
A low number indicates high precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use for the interface and direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number. If you do not specify the sequence number, a sequence number that is one number greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction is used. The valid range is 1–4294967295.
8.
To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG, in the Ports table or LAG table, click the port or
LAG so that a check mark displays.
You can add the ACL to several ports and LAGs.
The Ports and LAG tables display the available and valid interfaces for ACL binding. All nonrouting physical interfaces and interfaces participating in LAGs are listed.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
299
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the information displayed in the Interface Binding Status table.
Table 76. Interface Binding Status table
Field
Interface
Direction
ACL Type
ACL ID
Sequence Number
Description
The interface of the ACL assigned.
The selected packet filtering direction for the ACL.
The type of ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.
The ACL number (for an IP ACL) or ACL name (for a MAC ACL) identifying the ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.
The sequence number signifying the order of the specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to the selected interface and direction.
View or Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table
You can view or delete the MAC ACL bindings in the MAC Binding Table.
To view or delete MAC ACL bindings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security
>
ACL > Basic
>
MAC Binding Table
.
The MAC Binding Table displays.
6.
To delete a MAC ACL-to-interface binding, do the following:
a.
Select the check box next to the interface.
b.
Click the
Delete
button.
The binding is removed.
Manage Device Security
300
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table describes the information that is displayed in the MAC Binding Table.
Table 77. MAC Binding Table
Field
Interface
Direction
ACL Type
ACL ID
Sequence Number
Description
The interface of the ACL assigned.
The selected packet filtering direction for the ACL.
The type of ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.
The ACL name identifying the ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.
The sequence number signifying the order of the specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to the selected interface and direction.
Configure an IP ACL
An IP or IPv6 ACL consists of a set of rules that are matched sequentially against a packet.
When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule, the specified rule action (Permit or Deny) is taken, and the additional rules are not checked for a match. You must specify the interfaces to which an IP ACL applies, as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic.
Add an IP ACL
To add an IP ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IP ACL
.
The IP ACL Configuration page displays.
The IP ACL page shows the current size of the ACL table compared to the maximum size of the ACL table. The current size is equal to the number of configured IPv4 and IPv6
ACLs plus the number of configured MAC ACLs. The maximum size is 100.
Manage Device Security
301
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The Current Number of ACL field displays the current number of all ACLs configured on the switch.
The Maximum ACL field displays the maximum number of IP ACLs that can be configured on the switch.
6.
In the
IP ACL ID
field, specify the ACL ID or IP ACL name, which depends on the IP ACL type. The IP ACL ID is an integer in the following range:
• 1–99
. Creates a basic IP ACL, which allows you to permit or deny traffic from a source
IP address.
• 100–199
. Creates an extended IP ACL, which allows you to permit or deny specific types of Layer 3 or Layer 4 traffic from a source IP address to a destination IP address. This type of ACL provides more granularity and filtering capabilities than the standard IP ACL.
• IP ACL Name
. Create an IPv4 ACL name string that is up to 31 alphanumeric characters in length. The name must start with an alphabetic character.
Each configured ACL displays the following information:
• Rules
. The number of rules currently configured for the IP ACL.
• Type
. Identifies the ACL as a basic IP ACL (with an ID from 1 to 99), extended IP ACL
(with an ID from 100 to 199), or a named IP ACL.
7.
Click the
Add
button.
The IP ACL is added to the switch configuration.
Delete an IP ACL
To delete an IP ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security
>
ACL > Advanced
>
IP ACL
.
The IP ACL Configuration page displays.
Manage Device Security
302
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
Select the check box that is associated with the IP ACL.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The IP ACL is removed.
Configure Rules for a Basic IP ACL
You can define rules for IP-based standard ACLs (basic ACLs). The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded.
Note:
An implicit
deny all
rule is included at the end of an ACL list. This means that if an ACL is applied to a packet, and if none of the explicit rules match, then the final implicit
deny all
rule applies and the packet is dropped.
Add a Rule for a Basic IP ACL
To add a rule for a basic IP ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Rules
.
Manage Device Security
303
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
If no rules exist, the Basic ACL Rule Table shows the message
No rules have been configured for this ACL
. If one or more rules exist for the ACL, the rules display in the
Basic ACL Rule Table.
6.
From the
ACL ID
menu, select the IP ACL for which you want to add a rule.
For basic IP ACLs, this must be an ID in the range from 1 to 99.
7.
Click the
Add
button.
8.
Specify the following match criteria for the rule:
• Sequence Number
. Enter an ACL sequence number in the range of 1 to 2147483647 that is used to identify the rule. An IP ACL can contain up to 50 rules.
• Action
. Select the ACL forwarding action, which is one of the following:
Permit
. Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria.
Deny
. Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria.
• Egress Queue
. If the selection form the
Action
menu is
Permit
, you can specify the hardware egress queue identifier that is used to handle all packets matching this IP
ACL rule. The range of queue IDs is 0 to 7.
• Logging
. If the selection form the
Action
menu is
Deny
, you can enable logging for the ACL by selecting the
Enable
radio button. (Logging is subject to resource availability in the device.)
If the access list trap flag is also enabled, periodic traps are generated, indicating the number of times this rule was evoked during the report interval. A fixed five-minute report interval is used for the switch. A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval.
• Match Every
. From the
Match Every
menu, select whether all packets must match the selected IP ACL rule:
Enable
. All packets must match the selected IP ACL rule and are either permitted or denied.
Disable
. Not all packets need to match the selected IP ACL rule.
Manage Device Security
304
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Mirror Interface
.
From the
Mirror Interface
menu, select the specific egress interface to which the matching traffic stream must be copied, in addition to being forwarded normally by the switch.
This field cannot be set if a redirect interface is already configured for the IP ACL rule.
This field is visible for a Permit action.
• Redirect Interface
. From the
Redirect Interface
menu, select the egress interface to which the matching traffic stream must be redirected, bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the switch.
This field cannot be set if a mirror interface is already configured for the IP ACL rule.
• Src IP Address
. Enter an IP address using dotted-decimal notation to be compared to a packet’s source IP address as a match criterion for the selected IP ACL rule.
• Src IP Mask
. Specify the IP mask in dotted-decimal notation to be used with the source IP address value.
Wildcard masks determine which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A wildcard masking for an ACL functions differently from a subnet mask. A wildcard mask is in essence the inverse of a subnet mask. For example, to apply the rule to all hosts in the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet, enter 0.0.0.255 in the Source IP Mask field. A wildcard mask of 255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important. A wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that all of the bits are important.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Modify the Match Criteria for a Basic IP ACL Rule
To modify the match criteria for a basic IP ACL rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Rules
.
The IP Rules page displays.
Manage Device Security
305
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
6.
From the
ACL ID
menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to modify.
7.
In the Basic ACL Rule Table, click the rule.
The rule is a hyperlink. The Standard ACL Rule Configuration page displays.
8.
Modify the basic IP ACL rule criteria.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete a Basic IP ACL RUle
To delete a basic IP ACL rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Rules
.
The IP Rules page displays.
6.
From the
ACL ID
menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to modify.
7.
In the Basic ACL Rule Table, select the check box that is associated with the rule.
8.
Click the
Delete
button.
The rule is removed.
Configure Rules for an Extended IP ACL
You can define rules for IP-based extended ACLs. The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded.
Note:
An implicit
deny all
rule is included at the end of an ACL list. This means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit rules match, then the final implicit
deny all
rule applies and the packet is dropped.
Manage Device Security
306
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Add a Rule for an Extended IP ACL
To add a rule for an extended IP ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Extended Rules
.
The previous figure does not show all columns.
If no rules exists, the Extended ACL Rule Table shows the message
No rules have been configured for this ACL
. If one or more rules exist for the ACL, the rules display in the
Extended ACL Rule Table.
6.
From the
ACL ID/Name
menu, select the IP ACL for which you want to add a rule.
For extended IP ACLs, this must be an ID in the range from 101 to 199 or a name.
7.
Click the
Add
button.
Manage Device Security
307
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The previous figure does not show the rightmost fields.
8.
Configure the following match criteria for the rule:
• Sequence Number
. Enter a whole number in the range of 1 to 2147483647 that is used to identify the rule. An extended IP ACL can contain up to 50 rules.
• Action
. Select the ACL forwarding action, which is one of the following:
Permit
. Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria.
Deny
. Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria.
• Egress Queue
. If the selection from the
Action
menu is
Permit
, select the hardware egress queue identifier that is used to handle all packets matching this IP ACL rule.
The range of queue IDs is 0 to 7.
• Logging
. If the selection form the
Action
menu is
Deny
, you can enable logging for the ACL by selecting the
Enable
radio button. (Logging is subject to resource availability in the device.)
If the access list trap flag is also enabled, periodic traps are generated, indicating the number of times this rule was evoked during the report interval. A fixed five-minute report interval is used for the switch. A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval.
Manage Device Security
308
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Interface
. For a Permit action, use either a mirror interface or a redirect interface:
-
Select the
Mirror Interface
radio button and use the menu to specify the egress interface to which the matching traffic stream is copied, in addition to being forwarded normally by the device.
-
Select the
Redirect Interface
radio button and use the menu to specify the egress interface to which the matching traffic stream is forced, bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the device.
• Match Every
. From the
Match Every
menu, select whether all packets must match the selected IP ACL rule:
False
. Not all packets need to match the selected IP ACL rule. You can configure other match criteria on the page.
True
. All packets must match the selected IP ACL rule and are either permitted or denied. In this case, you cannot configure other match criteria on the page.
• Protocol Type
.
From the menu, select a protocol that a packet’s IP protocol must be matched against:
IP
,
ICMP
,
IGMP
,
TCP
,
UDP
,
EIGRP
,
GRE
,
IPINIP
,
OSPF
,
PIM
, or
Other
. If you select
Other
, specify enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.
• Src
. In the
Src
field, enter a source IP address, using dotted-decimal notation, to be compared to a packet’s source IP address as a match criterion for the selected IP
ACL rule:
-
If you select the
IP Address
radio button, enter an IP address or an IP address range. You can enter a relevant wildcard mask to apply this criteria. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
-
If you select the
Host
radio button, the wildcard mask is configured as 0.0.0.0. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
The wildcard mask determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that
none
of the bits are important. A wildcard of
255.255.255.255 indicates that
all
of the bits are important.
• Src L4
. The options are available only when the protocol is set to TCP or UDP. Use the source L4 port option to specify relevant matching conditions for L4 port numbers in the extended ACL rule.
You can select either the
Port
radio button or the
Range
radio button:
Port radio button
. If you select the
Port
radio button, you can either enter the port number yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:
•
The source IP TCP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
ftp
,
ftpdata
,
www-http
,
smtp
,
telnet
,
pop2
,
pop3
, and
bgp
.
•
The source IP UDP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
snmp
,
ntp
,
rip
,
time
,
who
, and
tftp
.
Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of the port range.
Select
Other
from the menu to enter a port number. If you select
Other
from the menu but leave the field blank, it means
any
.
Manage Device Security
309
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The relevant matching conditions for L4 port numbers are as follows:
• Equal
. IP ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is equal to the specified port number or port protocol.
• Not Equal
. IP ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is not equal to the specified port number or port protocol.
• Less Than
. IP ACL rule matches if the Layer 4 source port number is less than the specified port number.
• Greater Than
. IP ACL rule matches if the Layer 4 source port number is greater than the specified port number.
Range radio button
. If you select the
Range
radio button, the IP ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is within the specified port range.
The starting port, ending port, and all ports in between are a part of the Layer 4 port range.
The
Start Port
and
End Port
fields identify the first and last ports that are part of the port range. The values can range from 0 to 65535.
You can either enter the port range yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:
•
The destination IP TCP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
ftp
,
ftpdata
,
www-http
,
smtp
,
telnet
,
pop2
,
pop3
, and
bgp
.
•
The destination IP UDP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
snmp
,
ntp
,
rip
,
time
,
who
, and
tftp
.
Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of the port range.
Select
Other
from the menu to enter a port number. If you select
Other
from the menu but leave the field blank, it means
any
.
The wildcard mask determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that
none
of the bits are important. A wildcard of 255.255.255.255 indicates that
all
of the bits are important.
• Dst
. In the
Dst
field, enter a destination IP address, using dotted-decimal notation, to be compared to a packet’s destination IP address as a match criterion for the selected
IP ACL rule:
-
If you select the
IP Address
radio button, enter an IP address with a relevant wildcard mask to apply this criteria. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
-
If you select the
Host
radio button, the wildcard mask is configured as 0.0.0.0. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
The wildcard mask determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that
none
of the bits are important. A wildcard of
255.255.255.255 indicates that
all
of the bits are important.
Manage Device Security
310
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Dst L4
. The options are available only when the protocol is set to TCP or UDP. Use the destination L4 port option to specify relevant matching conditions for L4 port numbers in the extended ACL rule.
You can select either the
Port
radio button or the
Range
radio button:
Port radio button
. If you select the
Port
radio button, you can either enter the port number yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu.
•
The destination IP TCP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
ftp
,
ftpdata
,
www-http
,
smtp
,
telnet
,
pop2
,
pop3
, and
bgp
.
•
The destination IP UDP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
snmp
,
ntp
,
rip
,
time
,
who
, and
tftp
.
Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of the port range.
Select
Other
from the menu to enter a port number. If you select
Other
from the menu but leave the field blank, it means
any
.
The relevant matching conditions for L4 port numbers are as follows:
• Equal
. The IP ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 destination port number is equal to the specified port number or port protocol.
• Not Equal
. The IP ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 destination port number is not equal to the specified port number or port protocol.
• Less Than
. The IP ACL rule matches if the Layer 4 destination port number is less than the specified port number.
• Greater Than
. The IP ACL rule matches if the Layer 4 destination port number is greater than the specified port number.
Range radio button
. If you select the
Range
radio button, the IP ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 destination port number is within the specified port range. The starting port, ending port, and all ports in between are a part of the
Layer 4 port range.
The
Start Port
and
End Port
fields identify the first and last ports that are part of the port range. They values can range from 0 to 65535.
You can either select the enter the port range yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:
•
The destination IP TCP port range names are
domain
,
echo
,
ftp
,
ftpdata
,
www-http
,
smtp
,
telnet
,
pop2
,
pop3
, and
bgp
.
•
The destination IP UDP port range names are
domain
,
echo
,
snmp
,
ntp
,
rip
,
time
,
who
, and
tftp
.
Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of the port range.
Select
Other
from the menu to enter a port number. If you select
Other
from the menu but leave the field blank, it means
any
.
Manage Device Security
311
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The wildcard mask determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A wildcard mask of 0.0.0.0 indicates that
none
of the bits are important. A wildcard of 255.255.255.255 indicates that
all
of the bits are important.
• IGMP Type
. If you specify the IGMP type, the IP ACL rule matches the specified
IGMP message type. Possible values are in the range 0 to 255. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
• ICMP
. Select either the
Type
or
Message
radio button:
-
If you select the
Type
radio button, note the following:
•
The
Type
and
Code
fields are enabled only if the protocol is ICMP. Use these fields to specify a match condition for ICMP packets:
•
The IP ACL rule matches the specified ICMP message type. Possible type numbers are in the range from 0 to 255.
•
If you specify information in the
Message
field, the IP ACL rule matches the specified ICMP message code. Possible values for the code can be in the range from 0 to 255.
•
If these fields are left empty, it means
any
.
-
If you select the
Message
radio button, select the type of the ICMP message to match with the selected IP ACL rule. Specifying a type of message implies that both the ICMP type and ICMP code are specified. The ICMP message is decoded into the corresponding ICMP type and ICMP code within the ICMP type.
The IPv4 ICMP message types are
echo
,
echo-reply
,
host-redirect
,
mobile-redirect
,
net-redirect
,
net-unreachable
,
redirect
,
packet-too-big
,
port-unreachable
,
source-quench
,
router-solicitation
,
router-advertisement
,
ttl-exceeded
,
time-exceeded
, and
unreachable
.
• Fragments
. Either select the
Enable
radio button to allow initial fragments (that is, the fragment bit is asserted) or leave the default
Disable
radio button selected to prevent initial fragments from being used.
This option is not valid for rules that match L4 information such as a TCP port number, because that information is carried in the initial packet.
• Service Type
. Select a service type match condition for the extended IP ACL rule.
The possible options are
IP DSCP
,
IP precedence
, and
IP TOS
, which are alternative methods to specify a match criterion for the same service type field in the IP header.
Each method uses a different user notation. After you make a selection, you can specify the appropriate values:
IP DSCP
. This is an optional configuration. Specify the IP DiffServ Code Point
(DSCP) field. The DSCP is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the service type octet in the IP header. Enter an integer from 0 to 63. To select the IP DSCP, select one of the DSCP keywords from the menu. To specify a numeric value, select
Other
and a field displays in which you can enter numeric value of the DSCP.
IP Precedence
. This is an optional configuration. The IP precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order 3 bits of the service type octet in the IP header.
Enter an integer from 0 to 7.
Manage Device Security
312
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
IP TOS
. This is an optional configuration. The IP ToS field in a packet is defined as all 8 bits of the service type octet in the IP header. The ToS bits value is a hexadecimal number that is composed of numbers 00 to 09 and AA to FF. The
ToS mask value is a hexadecimal number that is composed of numbers 00 to FF.
The ToS mask denotes the bit positions in the ToS bits value that are used for comparison against the IP ToS field in a packet.
For example, to check for an IP ToS value for which bit 7 is set and is the most significant value, for which bit 5 is set, and for which bit 1 is cleared, use a ToS bits value of 0xA0 and a ToS mask of 0xFF.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Modify the Match Criteria for an Extended IP ACL Rule
To modify the match criteria for an existing extended IP ACL rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Extended Rules
.
The IP Rules page displays.
6.
From the
ACL ID
menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to modify.
7.
In the Extended ACL Rule Table, click the rule.
The rule is a hyperlink. The Extended ACL Rule Configuration page displays.
8.
Modify the extended IP ACL rule criteria.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
313
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Delete an Extended IP ACL Rule
To delete an extended IP ACL rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Extended Rules
.
The IP Rules page displays.
6.
From the
ACL ID
menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to delete.
7.
In the Extended ACL Rule Table, select the check box that is associated with the rule.
8.
Click the
Delete
button.
The rule is removed.
Configure an IPv6 ACL
An IP or IPv6 ACL consists of a set of rules that are matched sequentially against a packet.
When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule, the specified rule action (Permit or Deny) is taken, and the additional rules are not checked for a match.
Add an IPv6 ACL
To add an IPv6 ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Manage Device Security
314
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 ACL
.
The IPV6 Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
IPv6 ACL
field, specify a name to identify the IPv6 ACL.
This is the IPv6 ACL name string, which includes up to 31 alphanumeric characters only.
The name must start with an alphabetic character.
7.
Click the
Add
button.
The IPv6 ACL is added.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 78. IPv6 Configuration and IPv6 ACL Table information
Field
Current Number of ACL
Maximum ACL
Rules
Type
Description
The current number of the IP ACLs configured on the switch.
The maximum number of IP ACLs that can be configured on the switch.
The number of the rules associated with the IP ACL.
The type is IPv6 ACL.
Delete an IPv6 ACL
To delete an IPv6 ACL:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Manage Device Security
315
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 ACL
.
The IPv6 Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check box that is associated with the IPv6 ACL.
7.
Click the
Delete
button.
The IPv6 ACL is removed.
Configure Rules for an IPv6 ACL
You can define rules for IPv6 ACLs. The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded.
Note:
An implicit
deny all
rule is included at the end of an ACL list. This means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit rules match, then the final implicit
deny all
rule applies and the packet is dropped.
Add a Rule for an IPv6 ACL
Add a rule for an ACL IPv6:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 Rules
.
Manage Device Security
316
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The previous figure does not show all columns.
If no rules exists, the IPv6 ACL Rule Table shows the message
No rules have been configured for this ACL
. If one or more rules exist for the ACL, the rules display in the
IPv6 ACL Rule Table.
6.
From the
ACL Name
menu, select the IPv6 ACL for which you want to add a rule.
7.
Click the
Add
button.
The previous figure does not show the rightmost fields.
8.
Configure the following match criteria for the rule:
• Sequence Number
. Enter a whole number in the range of 1 to 2147483647 that is used to identify the rule. An extended IP ACL can contain up to 50 rules.
Manage Device Security
317
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Action
. Select the ACL forwarding action by selecting one of the following radio buttons:
Permit
. Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria.
Deny
. Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria.
• Egress Queue
. If you select the
Permit
radio button, select the hardware egress queue identifier that is used to handle all packets matching this IPv6 ACL rule. The range of queue IDs is 0 to 7.
• Logging
. If you select the
Deny
radio button, you can enable logging for the ACL by selecting the
Enable
radio button. (Logging is subject to resource availability in the device.)
If the access list trap flag is also enabled, periodic traps are generated, indicating the number of times this rule was evoked during the report interval. A fixed five-minute report interval is used for the switch. A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval.
• Interface
. For a Permit action, use either a mirror interface or a redirect interface:
-
Select the
Mirror Interface
radio button and use the menu to specify the egress interface to which the matching traffic stream is copied, in addition to being forwarded normally by the device.
-
Select the
Redirect Interface
radio button and use the menu to specify the egress interface to which the matching traffic stream is forced, bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the device.
• Match Every
. Select whether all packet must match the selected IPv6 ACL rule:
Disable
. Not all packets need to match the selected IPv6 ACL rule. You can configure other match criteria on the page.
Enable
. All packets must match the selected IPv6 ACL rule and are either permitted or denied. In this case, you cannot configure other match criteria on the page.
• Protocol Type
. Specify the IPv6 protocol type in one of the following ways:
-
From the
Protocol Type
menu, select
IPv6
,
ICMPv6
,
TCP
, or
UDP
.
-
From the
Protocol Type
menu, select
Other
, and in the associated field, specify an integer ranging from 0 to 255. This number represents the IPv6 protocol.
• Src
. In the
Src
field, enter a source IPv6 address or source IPv6 address range to be compared to a packet’s source IPv6 address as a match criterion for the selected
IPv6 ACL rule:
-
If you select the
IPv6 Address
radio button, enter an IPv6 address or IPv6 range to apply this criteria. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
-
If you select the
Host
radio button, enter a host source IPv6 address to match the specified IPv6 address. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
The source IPv6 address argument must be in the form documented in RFC 2373 where the address is specified in hexadecimal numbers using 16-bit values between colons.
Manage Device Security
318
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Src L4
. The options are available only when the protocol is set to TCP or UDP. Use the source L4 port option to specify relevant matching conditions for L4 port numbers in the extended ACL rule.
You can select either the
Port
radio button or the
Range
radio button:
Port radio button
. If you select the
Port
radio button, you can either enter the port number yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:
•
The source IP TCP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
ftp
,
ftpdata
,
www-http
,
smtp
,
telnet
,
pop2
,
pop3
, and
bgp
.
•
The source IP UDP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
snmp
,
ntp
,
rip
,
time
,
who
, and
tftp
.
Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of the port range.
Select
Other
from the menu to enter a port number. If you select
Other
from the menu but leave the field blank, it means
any
.
The relevant matching conditions for L4 port numbers are as follows:
• Equal
. The IPv6 ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is equal to the specified port number or port protocol.
• Not Equal
. The IPv6 ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is not equal to the specified port number or port protocol.
• Less Than
. The IPv6 ACL rule matches if the Layer 4 source port number is less than the specified port number.
• Greater Than
. The IPv6 ACL rule matches if the Layer 4 source port number is greater than the specified port number.
Range radio button
. If you select the
Range
radio button, the IPv6 ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 source port number is within the specified port range.
The starting port, ending port, and all ports in between are a part of the Layer 4 port range.
The
Start Port
and
End Port
fields identify the first and last ports that are part of the port range. They values can range from 0 to 65535.
You can either enter the port range yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:
•
The source IP TCP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
ftp
,
ftpdata
,
www-http
,
smtp
,
telnet
,
pop2
,
pop3
, and
bgp
.
•
The source IP UDP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
snmp
,
ntp
,
rip
,
time
,
who
, and
tftp
.
Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of the port range.
Select
Other
from the menu to enter port numbers. If you select
Other
from the menu but leave the fields blank, it means
any
.
Manage Device Security
319
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Dst
. In the
Dst
field, enter a destination IPv6 address to be compared to a packet’s destination IPv6 address as a match criterion for the selected IPv6 ACL rule:
-
If you select the
IPv6 Address
radio button, enter an IPv6 address to apply this criteria. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
-
If you select the
Host
radio button, enter a host source IPv6 address to match the specified IPv6 address. If this field is left empty, it means
any
.
The source IPv6 address argument must be in the form documented in RFC 2373 where the address is specified in hexadecimal numbers using 16-bit values between colons.
• Dst L4
. The options are available only when the protocol is set to TCP or UDP. Use the destination L4 port option to specify relevant matching conditions for L4 port numbers in the extended ACL rule.
You can select either the
Port
radio button or the
Range
radio button:
Port radio button
. If you select the
Port
radio button, you can either enter the port number yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:
•
The destination IP TCP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
ftp
,
ftpdata
,
www-http
,
smtp
,
telnet
,
pop2
,
pop3
, and
bgp
.
•
The destination IP UDP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
snmp
,
ntp
,
rip
,
time
,
who
, and
tftp
.
Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of the port range.
Select
Other
from the menu to enter a port number. If you select
Other
from the menu but leave the field blank, it means
any
.
The relevant matching conditions for L4 port numbers are as follows:
• Equal
. The IPv6 ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 destination port number is equal to the specified port number or port protocol.
• Not Equal
. The IPv6 ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 destination port number is not equal to the specified port number or port protocol.
• Less Than
. The IPv6 ACL rule matches if the Layer 4 destination port number is less than the specified port number.
• Greater Than
. The IPv6 ACL rule matches if the Layer 4 destination port number is greater than the specified port number.
Range radio button
. If you select the
Range
radio button, the IPv6 ACL rule matches only if the Layer 4 destination port number is within the specified port range. The starting port, ending port, and all ports in between are a part of the
Layer 4 port range.
The
Start Port
and
End Port
fields identify the first and last ports that are part of the port range. They values can range from 0 to 65535.
Manage Device Security
320
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
You can either enter the port range yourself or select one of the following protocols from the menu:
•
The destination IP TCP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
ftp
,
ftpdata
,
www-http
,
smtp
,
telnet
,
pop2
,
pop3
, and
bgp
.
•
The destination IP UDP port protocols are
domain
,
echo
,
snmp
,
ntp
,
rip
,
time
,
who
, and
tftp
.
Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of the port range.
Select
Other
from the menu to enter port numbers. If you select
Other
from the menu but leave the fields blank, it means
any
.
• ICMPv6
. Select either the
Type
or
Message
radio button:
Type radio button
. If you select the
Type
radio button, note the following:
•
The
Type
and
Message
fields are enabled only if the protocol is ICMPv6. Use these fields to specify a match condition for ICMPv6 packets.
•
The IPv6 ACL rule matches the specified ICMPv6 message type. Possible type numbers are in the range from 0 to 255.
•
If you specify information in the
Message
field, the IPv6 ACL rule matches the specified ICMPv6 message code. Possible values for code can be in the range from 0 to 255.
•
If these fields are left empty, it means
any
.
Message radio button
. If you select the
Message
radio button, select the type of the ICMPv6 message to match with the selected IPv6 ACL rule. Specifying a type of message implies that both the ICMPv6 type and ICMPv6 code are specified.
The ICMPv6 message is decoded into the corresponding ICMPv6 type and
ICMPv6 code within the ICMP type.
The ICMPv6 message types are
destination-unreachable
,
echo-reply
,
echo-request
,
header
,
hop-limit
,
mld-query
,
mld-reduction
,
mld-report
,
nd-na
,
nd-ns
,
next-header
,
no-admin
,
no-route
,
packet-too-big
,
port-unreachable
,
router-solicitation
,
router-advertisement
,
router-renumbering
,
time-exceeded
, and
unreachable
.
• Fragments
. Either select the
Enable
radio button to allow initial fragments (that is, the fragment bit is asserted) or leave the default
Disable
radio button selected to prevent initial fragments from being used.
This option is not valid for rules that match L4 information such as TCP port number, because that information is carried in the initial packet.
• Routing
. Either select the
Enable
radio button to match packets that include a routing extension header or leave the default
Disable
radio button selected to ignore the routing extension headers in packets.
• Flow Label
. The
Flow Label
field is enabled only if selection from the
Protocol Type
menu is ICMPv6. The flow label is 20-bit number that is unique to an IPv6 packet and
Manage Device Security
321
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
that is used by end stations to signify Quality of Service handling in routers. The flow label can specified within the range 0 to 1048575.
• IPv6 DSCP Service
. Specify the IP DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) field. This is an optional configuration.
The DSCP is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the service type octet in the IPv6 header. Enter an integer from 0 to 63. To select the IPv6 DSCP, select one of the
DSCP keywords. To specify a numeric value, select
Other
and enter the numeric value of the DSCP.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Modify the Match Criteria for an IPv6 ACL Rule
To modify the match criteria for an IPv6 ACL rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 Rules
.
The IPv6 Rules page displays.
6.
From the
ACL Name
menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to modify.
7.
In the IPv6 ACL Rule Table, click the rule.
The rule is a hyperlink. The IPv6 ACL Rule Configuration page displays.
8.
Modify the IPv6 ACL rule criteria.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Manage Device Security
322
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Delete an IPv6 ACL Rule
To delete an IPv6 ACL rule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IPv6 Rules
.
The IPv6 Rules page displays.
6.
From the
ACL Name
menu, select the ACL that includes the rule that you want to delete.
7.
In the IPv6 ACL Rule Table, select the check box that is associated with the rule.
8.
Click the
Delete
button.
The rule is removed.
Configure IP ACL Interface Bindings
When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the rules that are defined are applied to the selected interface. You can assign ACL lists to ACL priorities and interfaces.
If resources on the switch are insufficient, an attempt to bind an ACL to an interface fails. You cannot bind an IPv4 ACL and an IPv6 ACL to the same interface.
To bind an IP ACL to one or more interfaces:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Manage Device Security
323
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > IP Binding Configuration
.
6.
From the
ACL ID
menu, select an existing IP ACL for you which you want to add an IP ACL interface binding.
The fixed selection from the
Direction
menu is
Inbound
, which means that MAC ACL rules are applied to traffic entering the interface.
7.
In the
Sequence Number
field, optionally specify a number to indicate the order of the access list relative to other access lists already assigned to this interface and direction.
A low number indicates high precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number. If you do not specify the sequence number
(meaning that the value is 0), a sequence number that is one number greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction is used. The valid range is 1–4294967295.
8.
To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG, in the Ports table or LAG table, click the port or
LAG so that a check mark displays.
You can add the ACL to several ports and LAGs.
Manage Device Security
324
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The Ports and LAG tables display the available and valid interfaces for ACL binding. All nonrouting physical interfaces, VLAN interfaces, and interfaces participating in LAGs are listed.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 79. IP Binding Status table
Field
Interface
Direction
ACL Type
ACL ID/Name
Sequence Number
Description
The selected interface.
The selected packet filtering direction for the ACL.
The type of ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.
The ACL number (for an IP ACL) or ACL name (for a named IP ACL or
IPv6 ACL) identifying the ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.
The sequence number signifying the order of specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to the selected interface and direction.
View or Delete IP ACL Bindings in the IP ACL Binding Table
You can view or delete the IP ACL bindings.
To view or delete IP ACL bindings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL > Advanced > Binding Table
.
The IP ACL Binding Table displays.
6.
To delete an IP ACL-to-interface binding, do the following:
Manage Device Security
325
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports a.
Select the check box next to the interface.
b.
Click the
Delete
button.
The binding is removed.
The following table describes the information displayed in the IP ACL Binding Table.
Table 80. IP ACL Binding Table
Field
Interface
Direction
ACL Type
ACL ID/Name
Sequence Number
Description
The interface.
The selected packet filtering direction for the ACL.
The type of ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.
The ACL number (for an IP ACL) or ACL name (for a named IP ACL or
IPv6 ACL) identifying the ACL assigned to the selected interface and direction.
The sequence number signifying the order of the specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to the selected interface and direction.
Configure VLAN ACL Bindings
You can associate an ACL with a VLAN. When an ACL is associated with a VLAN, it is applied to all interfaces that are members of the VLAN.
To configure VLAN ACL bindings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Security > ACL> Advanced > VLAN Binding Configuration
.
The VLAN Binding Configuration page displays.
6.
In the
VLAN ID
field, enter the VLAN ID to which the binding must apply.
Manage Device Security
326
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
7.
From the
Direction
menu, select the packet filtering direction.
8.
In the
Sequence Number
field, enter an optional sequence number.
You can specify an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other access lists that are already assigned to the VLAN ID and selected direction. A lower number indicates a higher precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use for the VLAN ID and selected direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached ACL using that sequence number. If you do not specify a sequence number (the value is 0), a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for the VLAN ID and selected direction is used. The valid range is 1 to 4294967295.
9.
From the
ACL Type
menu, select the type of ACL.
Valid ACL types include IP ACL, MAC ACL, and IPv6 ACL.
10.
From the
ACL ID
list, select the ID or name of the ACL that must be bound to the specified
VLAN.
11.
Click the
Add
button.
The VLAN ACL binding is added.
Manage Device Security
327
7.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
•
Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings
•
•
•
•
7
328
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Reboot the Switch
You can reboot the switch from the local browser interface.
Note:
The switch provides a recessed multi-function
Reset
button on the back panel that lets you reboot (power-cycle) the switch. To reboot the switch, press the
Reset
button for about two seconds. (Do not press the button for more than five seconds!) The switch restarts but retains its custom settings.
To reboot the switch:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Reset > Device Reboot
.
6.
The Device Reboot page displays.
7.
Select the check box.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
The switch reboots.
Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings
You can reset the system configuration to the factory default values. All changes that you made are lost. If the IP address changes, your web session might disconnect.
If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before, all Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last configuration saved on the cloud server, including the switch password (that is, the password is reset to the Insight network password). Otherwise, the IP address is reset to 192.168.0.239, the DHCP client is enabled, and the password is reset to
Perform Maintenance Tasks
329
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports password
. The default management mode is reset to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and
Insight Cloud Portal.
For information about reconnecting to the switch, see
For information about changing the management mode, see
Change the Management Mode of the Switch
Note:
The switch provides a recessed multi-function
Reset
button on the back panel that lets you return the switch to its factory default settings, causing all custom settings to be erased. The factory default settings function of the
Reset
button is available only after you use the
NETGEAR Insight app to remove the switch from your network. After you use the NETGEAR Insight app to remove the switch from your network, press the
Reset
button for at least five seconds. The switch restarts and returns to its factory default settings.
To reset the switch to the factory default settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Reset > Factory Default
.
The Factory Default page displays.
6.
Select the check box.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
A confirmation pop-up window opens.
8.
Click the
OK
button to confirm.
All configuration settings are reset to their factory default values. All changes that you made are lost, even if you saved the configuration.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
330
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Export a File From the Switch
You can export configuration (ASCII or log ASCII) files from the switch to a file server by using TFTP or HTTP.
The following sections describe how you can export a file from the switch:
•
Export a File to the TFTP Server
•
Use an HTTP Sessions to Export a File
Export a File to the TFTP Server
You can upload (export) configuration (ASCII or log ASCII) files from the switch to a TFTP server on the network.
To export a file from the switch to a TFTP server:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Export > TFTP File Export
.
The TFTP File Export page displays.
6.
From the
File Type
menu, select the type of file:
• Text Configuration
. A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured text file ( startup-config
) offline as needed. The most common usage of text-based configuration is to upload a working configuration from a device, edit it offline to personalize it for another similar device (for example, change the device name or IP address), and download it to that device.
• Error Log
. The system error (persistent) log, also referred to as the event log.
• Trap Log
. The trap log with the system trap records.
• Buffered Log
. The system buffered (in-memory) log.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
331
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
• Tech Support
. The tech support file is a text-base file that contains a variety of hardware, software, and configuration information that can assist in device and network troubleshooting.
• Crash Logs
. Specify the crash logs to retrieve them.
7.
From the
Server Address Type
menu, select the format for the
Server Address
field:
• IPv4
. Indicates that the TFTP server address is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. This is the default setting.
• DNS
. Indicates that the TFTP server address is a host name.
8.
In the
Server Address
field, enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the server address type.
The default is the IPv4 address 0.0.0.0.
9.
In the
Transfer File Path
field, specify the path on the TFTP server where you want to save the file.
You can enter up to 32 characters. Include the backslash at the end of the path. A path name with a space is not accepted. Leave this field blank to save the file to the root TFTP directory.
10.
In the
Transfer File Name
field, specify a destination file name for the file to be uploaded.
You can enter up to 32 characters. The transfer fails if you do not specify a file name. For an archive transfer, use a
.stk
file extension.
11.
Select the
Start File Transfer
check box.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
The file transfer begins.
The page displays information about the file transfer progress. The page refreshes automatically when the file transfer completes (or if it fails).
Use an HTTP Sessions to Export a File
You can upload (export) files of various types from the switch to a management system through an HTTP session by using your web browser.
To export a file from the switch to another system by using HTTP:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
332
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Export > HTTP File Export
.
The HTTP File Export page displays.
6.
From the
File Type
menu, select the type of file:
• Text Configuration
. A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured text file ( startup-config
) offline as needed. The most common usage of text-based configuration is to upload a working configuration from a device, edit it offline to personalize it for another similar device (for example, change the device name or IP address), and download it to that device.
• Tech Support
. The tech support file is a text-base file that contains a variety of hardware, software, and configuration information that can assist in device and network troubleshooting.
• Crash Logs
. Specify crash logs to retrieve them.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
The file transfer begins.
The page displays information about the file transfer progress. The page refreshes automatically when the file transfer completes (or if it fails).
Download a File to the Switch
You can manually check for the latest firmware version through the local browser interface of the switch, download the firmware, and upload the firmware to the switch. If firmware release notes are available with new firmware, read the release notes to find out if you must reconfigure the switch after updating.
You can download system files from a remote system to the switch by using either TFTP or
HTTP. This download process is referred to as an upgrade.
The following sections describe how you can download a file to the switch:
•
Download a File to the Switch Using TFTP
•
Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP
Download a File to the Switch Using TFTP
You can upgrade software and download the image file, the configuration files, and SSL files from a TFTP server to the switch.
Before you download a file to the switch, the following conditions must be true:
•
The file to download from the TFTP server is on the server in the appropriate directory.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
333
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
•
The file is in the correct format.
•
The switch contains a path to the TFTP server.
You can also download files by using HTTP. See
Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP
on page 335 for additional information.
To download a file to the switch from a TFTP server:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Upgrade > TFTP File Upgrade
.
The TFTP File Upgrade page displays.
6.
From the
File Type
menu, select the type of file:
• Software
. The system software image, which is saved in one of two flash sectors called images (image1 and image2). The active image stores the active copy, while the other image stores a second copy. The device boots and runs from the active image. If the active image is corrupted, the system automatically boots from the nonactive image. This is a safety feature for faults occurring during the boot upgrade process. The default setting is Archive.
• Text Configuration
. A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured text file ( startup-config
) offline as needed. The most common usage of text-based configuration is to upload a working configuration from a device, edit it offline to personalize it for another similar device (for example, change the device name or IP address), and download it to that device.
• SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File
. SSL Trusted Root Certificate File (PEM
Encoded).
• SSL Server Certificate PEM File
. SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File
. SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File
. SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
Perform Maintenance Tasks
334
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
7.
If the selection from the
File Type
menu is
Software
, the
Image Name
menu is displayed and you must select the software image that must be downloaded to the switch:
• image1.
Select image1 to upload image1.
• image2
. Select image2 to upload image2.
Note:
We recommended that you do not overwrite the active image. If you do so, the switch displays a warning that you are trying to overwrite the active image.
8.
From the
Server Address Type
menu, select the format for the
TFTP Server IP
field:
• IPv4
. Indicates that the TFTP server address is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. This is the default setting.
• DNS
. Indicates that the TFTP server address is a host name.
9.
In the
TFTP Server IP
field, enter the IP address of the TFTP server indicated by the server address type.
The default is the IPv4 address 0.0.0.0.
10.
In the
Transfer File Path
field, specify the path on the TFTP server where the file is located.
Enter up to 160 characters. Include the backslash at the end of the path. A path name with a space is not accepted. Leave this field blank to save the file to the root TFTP directory.
11.
In the
Remote File Name
field, specify the name of the file to download from the TFTP server.
You can enter up to 32 characters. A file name with a space is not accepted.
12.
Select the
Start File Transfer
check box to initiate the file upload.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
The file transfer begins.
The page displays information about the progress of the file transfer. The page refreshes automatically when the file transfer completes (or if it fails).
To activate a software image that you downloaded to the switch, see
Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP
You can upgrade software and download the image file, the configuration files, and SSL files to the switch through an HTTP session by using your web browser.
To download a file to the switch using HTTP:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
335
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Upgrade > HTTP File Upgrade
.
The HTTP File Upgrade page displays.
6.
From the
File Type
menu, select the type of file:
• Software
. The system software image, which is saved in one of two flash sectors called images (image1 and image2). The active image stores the active copy, the other image stores a second copy. The device boots and runs from the active image.
If the active image is corrupted, the system automatically boots from the nonactive image. This is a safety feature for faults occurring during the boot upgrade process.
The default setting is Archive.
• Text Configuration
. A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured text file ( startup-config
) offline as needed. The most common usage of text-based configuration is to upload a working configuration from a device, edit it offline to personalize it for another similar device (for example, change the device name, serial number, IP address), and download it to that device.
• SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File
. SSL Trusted Root Certificate File (PEM
Encoded).
• SSL Server Certificate PEM File
. SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File
. SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File
. SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
7.
If the selection from the
File Type
menu is
Software
, the
Image Name
menu is displayed and you must select the software image that must be downloaded to the switch:
• image1.
Select image1 to upload image1.
• image2
. Select image2 to upload image2.
Note:
We recommended that you do not overwrite the active image. If you do so, the switch displays a warning that you are trying to overwrite the active image.
8.
Select the Select File
Browse
button and locate the file that you want to download.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
336
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The file name can contain up to 80 characters.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
The file transfer begins.
The page displays information about the progress of the file transfer. The page refreshes automatically when the file transfer completes (or if it fails).
Note:
After a file transfer is started, wait until the page refreshes. When the page refreshes, the option to select a file option is no longer available, indicating that the file transfer is complete.
To activate a software image that you downloaded to the switch, see
Note:
After a text configuration file is downloaded, the switch applies the configuration automatically.
Manage Software Images
The system maintains two versions of the switch software in permanent storage. One image is the active image, and the second image is the backup image. The active image is loaded during subsequent switch restarts. This feature reduces switch down time when you are upgrading or downgrading the switch software.
A legacy software version can ignore (that is, might not load) a configuration file that is created by a newer software version. When a configuration file created by the newer software version is discovered by the system running an older version of the software, the system displays an appropriate warning.
The following sections describe how you can manage the images:
•
•
Copy an Image
You can copy an image from one location (primary or backup) to another.
To copy an image:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
337
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > File Management > Copy
.
The Copy page displays.
6.
Select the Source Image
image1
or
image2
radio button to specify the image to be copied.
7.
Select the Destination Image
image1
or
image2
radio button to specify the destination image.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Dual Image Settings
The Dual Image feature allows the switch to retain two images in permanent storage. You can select which image to load during the next boot cycle, configure an image description, or delete an image. This feature reduces switch down time when you are upgrading or downgrading the software image.
Change the Image That Loads During the Boot Process
To change the image that loads during the boot process:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
338
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > File Management > Dual Image > Dual Image Configuration
.
The Dual Image Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Image Name
menu, select the image that is
not
the image displayed in the
Current-active field.
The Current-active field displays the name of the active image.
7.
To specify a name for the selected image, enter one in the
Image Description
field.
8.
Select the
Activate Image
check box.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Note:
After activating an image, you must perform a system reset of the switch to run the new code. The switch continues running the image shown in the Current-active field until the switch reboots.
Delete an Image
To delete an image:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > File Management > Dual Image > Dual Image Configuration
.
The Dual Image Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Image Name
menu, select the image that is
not
the image displayed in the
Current-active field.
The Current-active field displays the name of the active image. You cannot delete the active image.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
339
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
7.
Select the
Delete
Image check box.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
The image is removed.
View the Dual Image Status
You can view information about the active and backup images on the switch.
To view dual image status information:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > File Management > Dual Image > Dual Image Status
.
The Dual Image Status page displays.
The following table describes the information available on the page.
Table 81. Dual Image Status information
Field
Image1 Ver
Image2 Ver
Current-active
Next-active
Image1 Description
Image2 Description
Description
The version of the image1 code file.
The version of the image2 code file.
The currently active image on this switch.
The image to be used on the next restart of this switch.
The description associated with the image1 code file.
The description associated with the image2 code file.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
340
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Perform Troubleshooting Tasks
You can send a ping or a traceroute.
The following sections describe how you can troubleshoot the switch and the network:
•
•
•
•
•
Send an IPv4 Ping
You can configure the switch to send a ping request to a specified IP address. You can use this to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IP station. When you click the
Apply
button, the switch sends a specified number of ping requests and the results are displayed.
If a reply to the ping is not received, the following message displays:
Tx = Count, Rx = 0 Min/Max/Avg RTT = 0/0/0 msec
If a reply to the ping is received, the following message displays:
Reply From a.b.c.d: icmp_seq = 0. time= xyz usec.
Reply From a.b.c.d: icmp_seq = 1. time= abc usec.
Reply From a.b.c.d: icmp_seq = 2. time= def usec.
Tx = count, Rx = count Min/Max/Avg RTT = xyz/abc/def msec
To send an IPv4 ping:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Ping IPv4
.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
341
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The Ping Details page displays.
6.
In the
IP Address/Host Name
field, enter the IP address or host name of the device that must be pinged.
7.
In the
Count
field, enter the number of echo requests that must be sent.
The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 15.
8.
In the
Interval
field, enter the time between ping packets in seconds.
The default value is 3 seconds. The range is 1 to 60.
9.
In the
Size
field, enter the size of the ping packet. The default value is 0 bytes. The range is
0 to 13000.
10.
From the
Source
menu, select the IP address or interface that must be used to send echo request packets:
• None
. The source address of the ping packet is the address of the default egress interface.
• IP Address
. The source IP address that must be used when echo request packets are sent. With this selection, the
IP Address
field displays and you must enter the IP address that must be used as the source.
• Interface
. The interface that must be used when echo request packets are sent. With this selection, the
Interface
menu displays and you must select an interface as the source.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
The specified address is pinged. The results are displayed below the configurable data in the Results field.
Send an IPv6 Ping
This page is used to send a ping request to a specified host name or IPv6 address. You can use this to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IPv6 station. When you click the
Apply
button, the switch sends a specified number of ping requests and the results are displayed below the configurable data. The output displays the following:
Send count=n, Receive count=n from (IPv6 Address). Average round trip time = n ms.
To send an IPv6 ping:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
342
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Ping IPv6
.
The Ping IPv6 page displays.
6.
From the
Ping
menu, select the type of ping:
• Global
. Pings a global IPv6 address.
• Link Local
. Pings a link-local IPv6 address over a specified interface. With this selection, the
Interface
menu displays, and you must select the interface.
7.
In the
IPv6 Address/Hostname
field, enter the IPv6 address or host name of the station that must be pinged.
The format is xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx. The maximum number of characters is 255.
8.
In the
Count
field, enter the number of echo requests that must be sent.
The range is 1 to 15. The default value is 3.
9.
In the
Interval
field, enter the time in seconds between ping packets.
The range is 1 to 60. The default value is 3.
10.
In the
Datagram Size
field, enter the datagram size.
The valid range is 0 to 13000. The default value is 0 bytes.
11.
From the
Source
menu, select the IP address or interface that must be used to send echo request packets:
• None
. The source address of the ping packet is the address of the default egress interface.
• IPv6 Address
. The source IP address that must be used when echo request packets are sent. With this selection, the
IPv6 Address
field displays and you must enter the
IPv6 address that must be used as the source.
• Interface
. The interface that must be used when echo request packets are sent. With this selection, the
Interface
menu displays and you must select an interface as the source.
12.
Click the
Apply
button.
The specified address is pinged. The results are displayed below the configurable data in the Results field.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
343
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Send an IPv4 Traceroute
You can configure the switch to send a traceroute request to a specified IP address or host name. You can use this to discover the paths that packets take to a remote destination. Once you click the
Apply
button, the switch sends a traceroute and the results are displayed below the configurable data.
If a reply to the traceroute is received, the following message displays:
1 e.f.g.h 9869 usec 9775 usec 10584 usec
2 0.0.0.0 0 usec * 0 usec * 0 usec *
3 0.0.0.0 0 usec * 0 usec * 0 usec *
Hop Count = j Last TTL = k Test attempt = m Test Success = n.
To send an IPv4 traceroute:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Traceroute IPv4
.
The Traceroute page displays.
6.
In the
IP Address/Hostname
field, enter the IP address or host name of the device for which the path must be discovered.
7.
In the
Probes Per Hop
field, enter the number of probes per hop.
The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 10.
8.
In the
Max TTL
field, enter the maximum time to live (TTL) for the destination.
The default value is 30. The range is 1 to 255.
9.
In the
Init TTL
field, enter the initial TTL to be used.
The default value is 1. The range is 1 to 255.
10.
In the
MaxFail
field, enter the maximum number of failures allowed in the session.
The default value is 5. The range is 1 to 255.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
344
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
11.
In the
Interval
field, enter the time between probes in seconds.
The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 60.
12.
In the
Port
field, enter the UDP destination port for the probe packets.
The default value is 33434. The range is 1–65535.
13.
In the
Size
field, enter the size of the probe packets.
The default value is 0. The range is 0 to 39936.
14.
From the
Source
menu, select the IP address or interface that must be used to send echo request packets:
• None
. The source address for the traceroute is the address of the default egress interface.
• IP Address
. The source IP address that must be used for the traceroute. With this selection, the
IP Address
field displays and you must enter the IP address that must be used as the source.
• Interface
. The interface that must be used for the traceroute. With this selection, the
Interface
menu displays and you must select an interface as the source.
15.
Click the
Apply
button.
A traceroute request is sent to the specified IP address or host name. The results are displayed below the configurable data in the Results field.
Send an IPv6 Traceroute
You can configure the switch to send a traceroute request to a specified IPv6 address or host name. You can use this to discover the paths that packets take to a remote destination. Once you click the
Apply
button, the switch sends a traceroute and the results are displayed below the configurable data.
If a reply to the traceroute is received, the following message displays:
1 a:b:c:d:e:f:g 9869 usec 9775 usec 10584 usec
2 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 0 usec * 0 usec * 0 usec *
Hop Count = p Last TTL = q Test attempt = r Test Success = s.
To send an IPv6 traceroute:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
345
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Traceroute IPv6
.
The Traceroute IPv6 page displays.
6.
In the
IPv6 Address/Host Name
field, enter the IPv6 address or host name of the device for which the path must be discovered.
7.
In the
Probes Per Hop
field, enter the number of probes per hop.
The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 10.
8.
In the
Max TTL
field, enter the maximum time to live (TTL) for the destination.
The default value is 30. The range is 1 to 255.
9.
In the
Init TTL
field, enter the initial TTL to be used.
The default value is 1. The range is 1 to 255.
10.
In the
MaxFail
field, enter the maximum number of failures allowed in the session.
The default value is 5. The range is 1 to 255.
11.
In the
Interval
field, enter the time between probes in seconds.
The default value is 3. The range is 1 to 60.
12.
In the
Port
field, enter the UDP destination port for the probe packets.
The default value is 33434. The range is 1–65535.
13.
In the
Size
field, enter the size of the probe packets.
The default value is 0. The range is 0 to 39936.
14.
From the
Source
menu, select the IP address or interface that must be used to send echo request packets:
• None
. The source address for the traceroute is the address of the default egress interface.
• IP Address
. The source IP address that must be used for the traceroute. With this selection, the
IPv6 Address
field displays and you must enter the IPv6 address that must be used as the source.
• Interface
. The interface that must be used for the traceroute. With this selection, the
Interface
menu displays and you must select an interface as the source.
15.
Click the
Apply
button.
A traceroute request is sent to the specified IP address or host name. The results are displayed below the configurable data in the Results field.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
346
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Enable Remote Diagnostics
You can enable or disable the option to access the switch remotely. When remote access is enabled, you can perform diagnostics services.
To enable remote diagnostics:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Maintenance > Troubleshooting > Remote Diagnostics
.
The Remote Diagnostics page displays.
6.
Select the
Enable
radio button.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Perform Maintenance Tasks
347
8.
Manage Power over Ethernet
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
•
Device Class Power Requirements
•
Power Allocation and Power Budget
•
Configure the Global PoE Settings
•
Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration
•
Reset One or More PoE or PoE+ Ports
•
Note:
This chapter applies to models GC110P, GC510P, and GC510PP.
Model GC110 does not support Power over Ethernet.
8
348
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
PoE Overview
Depending on the model, the switch includes eight Power over Ethernet plus (PoE) or PoE plus (PoE+) ports.
The following table shows the capacity for each model.
Table 82. PoE capacities for each model
Model
GC110
GC110P
GC510P
GC510PP
Maximum PoE Power
Per Port
Maximum Power Budget
Across All Active PoE Ports
PoE is not supported PoE is not supported
15.4W PoE (IEEE 802.3af) 62W
30W PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at) 124W
30W PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at) 195W
By default, supplied power is prioritized in ascending port order, up to the total power budget of the device. If the power requirements for the attached devices exceed the total power budget of the switch, the power to the device on the highest-numbered PoE or PoE+ port is disabled to make sure that the devices connected to the higher-priority, lower-numbered PoE or PoE+ ports are supported first.
It is important to note that although a device is listed as an 802.3at (PoE+) powered or
802.3af (PoE) powered device, it might not require the maximum power limit that is specified.
Many devices require less power, allowing all eight PoE ports to be active simultaneously, when the devices correctly report their PoE class to the switch.
Device Class Power Requirements
PoE and PoE+ use Ethernet cables to supply power to PoE-capable devices on the network, such as WiFi access points, IP cameras, VoIP phones, and switches. The switch is compliant with the IEEE 802.3at standard (PoE+) and backward compatible with the IEEE 802.3af standard (PoE). The switch can pass power through to any powered device (PD) that supports these standards. PoE and PoE+ let you power such devices without the need for a separate power supply.
The switch supports a Plug-and-Play process by which it detects the type of device that is connected to one of its PoE+ ports and whether that device needs power and how much so that the switch can provide the correct power the device.
During the Plug-and-Play process, the connected device can provide its Class response to the switch in many ways, depending on how the vendor programmed the device.
Manage Power over Ethernet
349
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The following table shows the device classes for PoE+ devices adhering to the IEEE 802.3at standard. The device classes for PoE devices adhering to the IEEE 802.3af standard are identical with the exception that Device Class 4 is not supported.
Table 83. PoE and PoE+ device class power allocation
2
3
4
0
1
Device
Class
Standard Range of Power
Delivered to the
Powered Device
PoE and PoE+ 0.44W–12.95W
PoE and PoE+ 0.44W–3.84W
PoE and PoE+
PoE and PoE+
PoE+ only
3.84W–6.49W
6.49W–12.95W
12.95W–25.5W
Minimum Output at
PoE Switch Port
(Minimum Allocated)
15.4W
4.0W
7.0W
15.4W
30.0W
Maximum Output at
PoE Switch Port
(Maximum Allocated)
16.2W
4.2W
7.4W
16.2W
31.6W
Power Allocation and Power Budget
The switch is a smart switch in that it can allocate the required power to a connected device by using a prioritization scheme: By default, power is supplied in ascending port order (that is, lower port numbers are served first) until the power budget is consumed and insufficient power remains to allocate to the next device. When less than 7W of PoE power is available on a port, the port PoE LED lights yellow, and the attached device does not receive power from the port. However, the switch continues to send data through the port connection.
The switch is also a smart switch in that it can override the IEEE power classification of a powered device (PD): If the PD consumes less power than required by its power classification, the switch provides only the power that the PD consumes instead of the power that is required by the PD’s power classification.
If some PoE+ ports are in use and deliver power, you can calculate the available power budget for the other PoE+ ports by subtracting the consumed (that is, delivered power) from the total available power budget. (For information about the total available power budget, see
An example for model GC510P:
Port 1 delivers 4.4W to a PD. The available power budget is 119.6W (124W–4.4W).
Another example for model GC510P:
A Class 4 PD is attached to Port 1, a Class 2 PD to Port 2, and another Class 4 PD to Port 3.
However, the PDs consume less power than defined by their classes: The PD attached to
Port 1 consumes 7.3W, the PD attached to Port 2 consumes 4.7W, and the PD attached to
Port 3 consumes 8.9W. So even though the switch provides power to two Class 4 devices and one Class 3 device, the available power budget is 103.1W (124W–7.3–4.7–8.9W).
Manage Power over Ethernet
350
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
To determine the delivered power by PoE or PoE+ ports:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration
.
The previous figure does not show all columns on the page.
The delivered power is stated in the Output Power (mW) column (which is not shown in the previous figure).
Configure the Global PoE Settings
To configure the global PoE settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
Manage Power over Ethernet
351
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration
.
6.
In the
System Usage Threshold
field, enter a number from 1 to 99 to set the threshold level at which a trap is sent if the consumed power exceeds the threshold power.
7.
From the
Power Management mode
menu, select the power management algorithm that the switch uses to deliver power to the requesting powered devices (PDs):
• Static
. Specifies that the power allocated for each port depends on the type of power threshold configured on the port.
• Dynamic
. Specifies that the power consumption on each port is measured and calculated in real time.
8.
To active the PoE traps, from the
Traps
menu, select
Enable
.
Selecting
Disable
deactivates the PoE traps. The default setting is Enabled.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your setting are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.
Table 84. PoE Configuration fields
Field
Firmware Version
Power Status
Total Power Available (W)
Threshold Power (W)
Consumed Power (W)
Description
The firmware version of the PoE firmware component.
The power status.
The maximum amount of power in watts that the switch can deliver to all ports.
If the consumed power is below the threshold power, the switch can power up another port. The consumed power can be between the nominal and threshold power. The threshold power is displayed in watts.
Note:
The threshold power value is determined by the value that you enter in the
System Usage Threshold
field.
The total amount of power in watts that is being delivered to all ports.
Manage Power over Ethernet
352
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration
Depending on the model, the switch includes eight PoE or PoE+ ports.
To configure and view the PoE or PoE+ port settings:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration
.
The previous figure does not show all columns on the page.
6.
Select the check boxes for the PoE or PoE+ ports that you want to configure or select the check box in the heading to configure all eight PoE or PoE+ ports.
7.
Configure the settings as described in the following table.
Manage Power over Ethernet
353
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
The settings that you configure apply to all selected PoE or PoE+ ports.
Menu Item
Port Power
Port Priority
Power Mode
Power Limit Type
Power Limit (W)
Description
Select the administrative mode of the port:
• Enable
. The port’s capacity to deliver power is enabled. This is the default setting.
• Disable
. The port’s capacity to deliver power is disabled.
The port priority determines which ports can still deliver power after the total power delivered by the switch exceeds the total power budget of 124W. (In such a situation, the switch might not be able to deliver power to all connected devices.)
If the same priority applies to two ports, the lower-numbered port receives higher priority.
Select one of the following priorities:
• Low
. Low priority. This is the default setting.
• Medium
. Medium priority.
• High
. High priority.
• Critical
. Critical priority.
Select the one of the following power modes:
• 802.3af
. The port is powered in and limited to the IEEE 802.3af mode. A PD that requires IEEE 802.3at does not receive power if the port functions in
IEEE 802.3af mode.
• Legacy
. The port is powered using high-inrush current, which is used by legacy PDs that require more than 15W to power up.
• Pre-802.3at
. The port is initially powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode and, before 75 msec pass, is switched to the high-power IEEE 802.3at mode.
Select this mode if the PD does not perform Layer 2 classification or if switch performs 2-event Layer 1 classification.
• 802.3at
. The port is powered in the IEEE 802.3at mode. This is the default mode. In this mode, if the switch detects that the attached PD is not a Class
4 device, the PD does not receive power from the switch.
The power limit type controls the maximum power that a port can deliver. Select one of the following types:
• None
. The port draws up to Class 0 maximum power in low power mode and up to Class 4 maximum power in high power mode.
• Class
. The port power limit is equal to the class of the attached PD.
• User
. The port power limit is equal to the value that is specified in the
Power Limit (W)
field. This is the default setting.
Note:
If a PD does not report its class correctly, use of these options can preserve additional PoE power by preventing the switch from delivering more power than the
PD requires. However, depending on which option you select, a PD that does not report its class correctly might not power up at all.
Enter the maximum power (in watts) that the port can deliver.
The range is 3.0–30.0W, with 0.1W steps. The default is 30W.
Manage Power over Ethernet
354
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Menu Item
Detection Type
Timer Schedule
Description
The detection type specifies how the port detects the attached PD. Select one of the following types:
• IEEE 802
. The port performs a 4-point resistive detection. This is the default setting.
• 4pt 802.3af + Legacy
. The port performs a 4-point resistive detection, and if required, continues with legacy detection.
• Legacy
. The port performs legacy detection.
If you set up a PoE timer schedule, you can assign it to the port by selecting the schedule from the
Timer Schedule
menu.
For information about PoE timer schedules, see
on page 357. By default, the selection from the menu is None.
If you want to remove a previously assigned timer schedule, select
None
from the
Timer Schedule
menu.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the PoE Port Configuration page.
Field
High Power
Max Power (W)
Class
Description
If a port supports High Power mode, the field displays Yes.
The maximum power in watts that the port can provide.
The class defines the range of power a powered device (PD) is drawing from the switch. The class definitions are as follows:
• 0
: 0.44–16.2W
• 1
: 0.44–4.2W
• 2
: 0.44–7.4W
• 3
: 0.44–16.2W
• 4
: 0.44–31.6W
• Unknown
. The class cannot be detected, or no PD is attached to the port.
Output Voltage (Volts) The voltage that is delivered to the PD in volts.
Output Current (mA) The current that is delivered to the PD in mA.
Output Power (W)
Status
The power that is delivered to the PD in watts.
The operational status of the port. The possible values are as follows:
• Disabled
. No power is delivered.
• Delivering Power
. Power is being drawn by the PD.
• Requesting Power
. The port is requesting power.
• Fault
. A problem occurred with the power.
• Test
. The port is in test mode.
• Other Fault
. The port is idle because of an error condition.
• Searching
. The port is not in one of the other states in this list.
Manage Power over Ethernet
355
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Field
Fault Status
Description
The error description when the PoE port is in a fault state. The possible values are as follows:
• No Error
. The port is not in any error state and can provide power.
• MPS Absent
. The port detected the absence of the main power supply, preventing the port from providing power.
• Short
. The port detected a short circuit condition, preventing the port from providing power.
• Overload
. The PD that is connected to the port attempts to draw more power than allowed by the port’s settings, preventing the port from providing power at all.
• Power Denied
. The port was denied power because of a shortage of power or because of an administrative condition. In this condition, the port cannot provide power.
Reset One or More PoE or PoE+ Ports
You can forcibly reset one or more PoE or PoE+ ports on the switch. If a PoE device is attached to the port, the device restarts. Resetting a PoE or PoE+ port does not affect its data link, so if a non-PoE device is attached to the port, the device is not affected and does not restart.
To reset one or more PoE or PoE+ ports:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired network connection, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration
.
The PoE Port Configuration page displays.
6.
Select the check boxes for the PoE or PoE+ ports that you want to reset or select the check box in the heading to reset all eight PoE or PoE+ ports.
7.
Click the
Power Cycle Port(s)
button.
The ports are reset.
Manage Power over Ethernet
356
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Set Up PoE Timer Schedules
The switch lets you define multiple timer schedules that you can use for PoE power delivery to attached PDs.
After you create a timer schedule, you can associate it with one or more PoE ports (see
Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration
on page 353). You can use a separate timer
schedule for each PoE port.
After you associate a timer schedule with a PoE port, the start date and time force the PoE port to stop delivering power and the stop date and time enable the PoE port to start delivering power.
You can create absolute schedules, which apply to specific dates and times, and you can create recurring schedules.
Create a PoE Timer Schedule
The maximum number of timer schedules that you can add is 100.
To create a PoE timer schedule:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration
.
The Timer Schedule Name page displays.
6.
In the
Timer Schedule Name
field, specify the name for a timer schedule.
7.
Click the
Add
button.
The timer schedule is added to the table on the Timer Schedule Name page and is assigned an ID.
Manage Power over Ethernet
357
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Specify the Settings for an Absolute PoE Timer Schedule
An absolute timer schedule applies to specific dates and times. The schedule is executed once only.
To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule that uses specific dates and times:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration
.
The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.
6.
In the Timer Schedule Selection section, make your selections from the following menus:
a. Timer Schedule Name
. Select the name of the timer schedule that you want to configure.
You can select only names of schedules that you created (see
b. Timer Schedule Type
. Select
Absolute
.
The fields in the Timer Schedule Configuration section might adjust to let you configure a timer schedule for specific dates and times.
Schedule
. To add a new entry, select
new
.
Selecting an existing entry lets you make changes to that entry.
7.
In the Timer Schedule Configuration section, specify the times and dates:
a.
In the
Time Start
field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the timer schedule must start.
b.
In the
Time End
field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the timer schedule must stop.
c.
Next to the
Date Start
field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYYY format to specify when the timer schedule must start.
Manage Power over Ethernet
358
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports d.
Next to the
Date End
field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYYY format to specify when the timer schedule must stop.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The entry for the timer schedule is added.
Specify the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule
A recurring schedule allows you to set up a single schedule that starts at a particular date and that recurs either with a specific end date or indefinitely.
For a single recurring PoE timer schedule, you can add a daily, weekly, and monthly schedule configuration. That is, these schedule configurations are not mutually exclusive but complement each other.
To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule that uses a recurring pattern:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System
> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration
.
The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.
6.
In the Timer Schedule Selection section, make your selections from the following menus:
a. Timer Schedule Name
. Select the name of the timer schedule that you want to configure.
You can select only names of schedules that you created (see
b. Timer Schedule Type
. Select
Periodic
.
The fields in the Timer Schedule Configuration section might adjust to let you configure a timer schedule with a recurrence pattern.
Schedule
. To add a new entry, select
new
.
Manage Power over Ethernet
359
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
Selecting an existing entry lets you make changes to that entry.
7.
In the Timer Schedule Configuration section, specify the recurrence pattern:
a.
In the
Time Start
field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the timer schedule must start.
b.
In the
Time End
field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the timer schedule must stop.
c.
Next to the
Date Start
field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYYY format to specify when the timer schedule must start.
d.
Either select the
No End Date
radio button or select the
End Date
radio button, and next to the
End Date
field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYYY format to specify when the timer schedule must stop.
e.
From the
Recurrence Pattern
menu, select the pattern:
• Daily
. The timer schedule works with daily recurrence. The fields adjust.
Either select the
Every Weekday
radio button to let the schedule operate from
Monday through Friday or select the
Every Day(s)
radio button and enter a number from 1 to 255 in the field.
In the latter case, the schedule is triggered every specified number of days.
• Weekly
. The timer schedule works with weekly recurrence. The fields adjust.
In the
Every Week(s)
field, enter a number from 1 to 255 to specify that the schedule must be triggered every specified number of weeks.
Select a single
Week Day
check box, multiple check boxes, or all check boxes to specify the day or days of the week that the schedule must operate.
• Monthly
. The timer schedule works with monthly recurrence. The fields adjust.
In the
Day
field, enter a number from 1 to 31 to specify the day of the month when the schedule must be triggered.
In the
Every Month(s)
field, enter a number from 1 to 255 to specify that the schedule must be triggered every specified number of months.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The entry for the timer schedule is added.
Change the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule Entry
You can change the settings for an existing recurring PoE timer schedule entry. (You cannot do this for an existing absolute PoE timer schedule.)
To change the settings for an existing recurring PoE timer schedule entry:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
Manage Power over Ethernet
360
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration
.
The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Timer Schedule Name
menu, select the schedule name.
7.
From the
Timer Schedule Type
menu, select the schedule type.
8.
From the
Timer Schedule Entry
menu, select the schedule entry.
9.
Make the changes to the schedule entry.
For more information, see
Specify the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Delete a PoE Timer Schedule Entry
You can delete a PoE timer schedule entry that you no longer need.
To delete a PoE timer schedule entry:
1.
Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.
You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.
2.
Launch a web browser.
3.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see
The login window opens.
4.
Enter the switch’s password in the
password
field.
The default password is
password
. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface, enter your Insight network password.
The System Information page displays.
Manage Power over Ethernet
361
Insight Managed 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Cloud Switch with 2 SFP Fiber Ports
5.
Select
System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration
.
The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.
6.
From the
Timer Sc